JP7319727B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine capable of imparting an advantageous state to a player.

Whether or not a game machine such as a pachinko game machine is provided with an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to a player when a game ball enters (passes) a predetermined area provided on a game board as a trigger. In addition to making a judgment, the identification information is variably displayed, and if the judgment result to the effect that an advantageous state is given is obtained, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and the advantageous state is transitioned. There is In the advantageous state, a round game in which the variable prize winning device provided on the game board is opened and then closed is executed a plurality of times, and when a game ball wins the variable prize winning device in the open state, a predetermined number of games are played. A ball is paid out.

In such a gaming machine, each time a game ball wins in a predetermined area, information indicating that a game ball has won in a predetermined area is set to a predetermined number (for example, four) as an upper limit (start A plurality of stored information) can be stored (retained), and based on this start storage information, the game is played by sequentially repeating the variable display and stop display of the identification information. Further, when the starting memory information is stored, before the variation display (the variation) of the identification information in the game corresponding to the stored starting memory information is started, the determination result of whether or not to give an advantageous state is obtained. Stores information indicating As a result, it is possible to give a big hit notice (announcement regarding an advantageous state) before the change starts.

In such a gaming machine, an effect is displayed to urge the player to operate the external input switch, and when the external input switch is operated, the degree of expectation for a big win, which indicates the high probability of shifting to a big win game state, is displayed. A system has been proposed in which a jackpot announcement is performed by displaying (see Patent Literature 1).

JP 2007-105247 A

However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, it is only determined whether or not the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed depending on whether or not the external input switch is operated. There was a problem that it became monotonous.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of giving notice of a more interesting advantageous state.

The present invention
Advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 61) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player;
Production execution means for producing production (for example, liquid crystal display device 4),
Production control means (for example, sub CPU71) for controlling the production execution means,
An operation means (for example, a pressing operation button 9A) capable of accepting a predetermined operation of the player,
The production executing means is capable of performing a specific production (for example, operation-linked production),
The specific effect sequentially transitions through a plurality of effect stages, and when it moves to the final effect stage and a specific condition is satisfied in the final effect stage , the predetermined effect is performed. is done,
Either a predetermined production stage or a specific production stage can be set for the production stage in the plurality of production stages,
The specific effect includes at least a first effect pattern in which the predetermined effect stage is set as the final effect stage, and a second effect pattern in which the specific effect stage is set as the final effect stage. including
The production control means, in the specific production,
When the current performance stage is the predetermined performance stage, when the predetermined operation is performed, according to the lottery result of a predetermined lottery, when it is not the final performance stage , it is shifted to the next performance stage. is possible, and in the case of the final production stage, it is possible to establish the specific condition,
When the current performance stage is the specific performance stage, when the predetermined operation is performed after the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, if the performance stage is not the final performance stage , the next performance stage is performed, and the final performance stage is performed. If it is the production stage of, the specific condition is established,
In the gaming machine, the specific effect may be shifted to the final effect stage without shifting to the specific effect stage as the plurality of effect stages.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of giving notice of a more interesting advantageous state.

1 is an external perspective view of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board in a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a game board in a game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of an LED unit in a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a block diagram showing a control circuit of the game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram showing the game state and effect mode of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a diagram showing specs of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a figure which shows the 1 round opening-and-closing pattern of the gaming machine based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the game machine based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning a prize opening-and-closing pattern and interval time between rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a diagram showing an example of a main variation pattern determination table of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch pending|holding change pattern determination table of the gaming machine based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch pending|holding change pattern determination table of the gaming machine based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the said fluctuation pending change pattern determination table of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the said fluctuation pending change pattern determination table of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation interlocking production|presentation scenario determination table of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation interlocking production|presentation stage transition determination table of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of effects for each operation-linked effect scenario of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of effects for each operation-linked effect scenario of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario determination table in RUSH mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main control circuit of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main control circuit of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a flowchart showing timer update processing of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing switch input processing of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol-related switch check process of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st start gate switch check processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd start gate switch check processing of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big winning a prize mouth switch check processing of the game machine which relates to one execution form of this invention. It is a flow chart showing a second big winning opening switch check process of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol control process of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol storage check process of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol determination process of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation time management process of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing a winning start interval management process of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing waiting time management processing before reopening the big winning opening of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing processing during the opening of the big winning opening of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing the winning end interval processing of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol game end processing of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flow chart showing command reception interrupt processing of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing depression operation button operation determination processing of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing depression operation button operation determination processing of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; 4 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; It is a flow chart which shows the production pattern determination processing of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing processing during RUSH mode of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows item production processing during RUSH mode of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flow chart showing normal mode processing of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pending|holding display mode change effect|presentation process of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart showing processing at the start of winning of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing processing at the time of V winning of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the operation interlocking production|presentation of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the operation interlocking production|presentation of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the operation interlocking production|presentation of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a screen display example of a handover selection operation screen of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a screen display example of a music selection operation screen of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a screen display example during the RUSH mode of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; It is a figure which shows an example of the item used by item production|presentation in the RUSH mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of item production|presentation in RUSH mode of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the pending|holding display mode change effect|action of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a screen display example of an effect at the time of V winning of the gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a large winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention; It is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening and closing pattern of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a displacement member operation pattern of the game machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol control process of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Structure of game machine]
First, an overview of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5. FIG. 1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board used in the game machine of this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of an LED unit provided on the game board. The game machine of this embodiment is applied to a pachinko game machine as an example.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment includes a main body frame base on which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which game balls can roll and flow is detachably provided. A main body frame 2 having a plate 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) and a front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) through which the game board 1 can be viewed ), a front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (on the player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 (see FIG. 3) for performing a predetermined effect display. is detachably provided with a rear frame base plate (not shown), and the rear frame (not shown) is rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the side opposite to the player). I have.

The pachinko game machine according to this embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6 . The body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via body frame hinges 2b. FIG. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed to the outer frame 6. In this state, the rear frame is , are housed in the outer frame 6 and are not shown.

The front frame 3 has a front frame base plate 3a and various front frame components provided on the front frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a-10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right decorative member 15, left decorative member 16) and the like. In addition, the front frame constituent members are not limited to these, and include all the members forming the front frame 3 . Further, the plate unit 8 has respective cover members (upper plate upper cover 8a, lower plate cover 8b, etc.) attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure, which will be described later.

In the front frame 3, a transparent protective glass 7 is provided in the front frame opening 3h. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window part) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3a. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, it faces the surface (front) side of the game board 1 and covers the surface (front) side. Speakers 10a and 10b for producing sounds are provided on both sides above the front frame opening 3h in the upper part of the front frame 3. As shown in FIG.

A decorative member is provided on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 so as to surround the front frame opening 3h for improving the appearance. As an example of a decorative member, a top decoration 14 containing a patrol lamp accessory, which will be described later, is provided above the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right sides of the front frame opening 3h. A changeable right decorative member 15 (eg, upper right lens 15a, right middle lens 15b, right panel cover 15c, etc.) and left decorative member 16 (eg, left outer lens 16a, etc.) are provided.

Inside the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16, light emitting means (e.g., lamps, LEDs 27, etc.) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, are provided (see FIG. 6). . The light emitted from the lamp/LED 27 passes through the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16, and is sensed from the right decorative member 15 and the left decorative member 16 as esthetic light such as emitted light or diffused light. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode by light, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, a plate unit 8 is provided on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The plate unit 8 includes an upper plate 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower plate 18 provided below the upper plate 17 and capable of storing, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper plate 17 is full. is provided.

The lower tray 18 includes a lower tray main body 18p capable of storing game balls, and a lower tray cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower tray main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p capable of storing game balls, an upper plate upper cover 8a detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper part of the upper plate main body 17p, A top plate decorative member for improving the appearance of the top plate 17 is provided. As an example of the top plate decorative member, the top plate main body 17p is provided with a top plate left decoration 17a, a top plate front decoration 17c, etc. so as to surround the top plate top cover 8a. passes through the front side from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a and is bent toward the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side.

The front frame base plate 3a has a payout port 20 for paying out game balls to the upper tray 17, and a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a. ) and a supply port 21 for supplying the game balls discharged from the discharge port to the lower tray 18 are provided. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, there are provided a ball passage for game balls paid out from a payout device 83 (see FIG. 6) and a ball passage cover (illustrated in the drawing) that forms a ball passage by connecting the discharge port and the supply port 21. ) is provided. When the game ball is paid out from the pay-out device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper tray 17 through the pay-out port 20, while the game ball is paid out, but the upper tray 17 remains near the pay-out port 20. is full, or when the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are discharged from the discharge port through the ball passage and the supply port 21 to the lower plate. sent to 18.

In this embodiment, the plated member is used to decorate the front surface of the game machine, and the plated member 17b is also used for the top plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front portion of the top plate 17. FIG. The use of the plated member 17b enhances the decorative effect of the appearance design of the game machine and enhances the interest of the player.

The upper plate cover 8a has a ball lending button 23 for lending balls, a return button 24 for returning cards from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 6) for lending game balls (not shown), and other predetermined buttons. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by being operated (pressing operation, rotating operation) by the player during the game. Although there are no particular restrictions on the arrangement (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9, as an example in the drawing, the push-down operation button 9A is projected vertically from the upper tray upper cover 8a, and the outer circumference of the push-down operation button 9A is projected. An operation unit 9 configured such that a jog dial 9B is arranged at .

Regarding the front frame 3, the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) of the front surface (front) of the front frame 3 is provided with an illegal wire such as a piano wire. It is possible to envision a situation in which a member is allowed to enter, and the unauthorized member commits a fraudulent act on various structures constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of that portion.

Therefore, in order to prevent such fraudulent activity, a cover member (not shown) with a wiring holding function is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at the portion where the above-described fraudulent member enters. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion for holding wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion for covering a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and unauthorized members such as piano wires. It is configured by integrating a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function that has three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and tamper prevention, so it is necessary to separately prepare members for each of these functions. is eliminated, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

The body frame 2 has a body frame base plate 2a and various body frame constituent members provided on the body frame base plate 2a. The body frame constituent members include the launching device 26, the speaker 10c, various control boards/relay boards, and the like. The body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members that constitute the body frame 2 are included.

In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. In addition, a shooting device 26 for shooting game balls is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a.

The firing device 26 includes a panel body 26a for disposing the firing device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a firing handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel body 26a, and the panel body 26a. It is disposed on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the back side of the body frame base plate 2a, and is configured with a shooting drive device (not shown) for shooting game balls.

A notch 3p for exposing the firing device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. As shown in FIG. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the firing device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3, and is adjacent to the above-described dish unit 8. Positioned. Such firing device 26 (panel body 26a, firing handle 26b) and dish unit 8 present an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

The shooting handle 26b includes a support (not shown), a handle grip 26d rotatably attached to the support and capable of rotating in clockwise and counterclockwise directions, and is provided in the support. A firing stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing of the ball, a firing stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning ON/OFF the firing stop switch, and a handle grip 26d are arranged so as to cover the opening. A handle cap 26h is provided.

When the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b is rotated clockwise, the driving force of the firing drive device is increased or decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle). The game ball being played is launched toward the game area 1p of the game board 1 (see FIG. 3). At this time, when the firing stop button 26e is operated, the firing driving device is controlled to stop, thereby stopping the firing of the game ball.

In this embodiment, operation control of the firing stop switch and firing handle 26b is performed by a payout/fire control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6). Inside the shooting device 26, a spring member (not shown) is provided for always elastically biasing the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction. A game ball is shot by rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction.

When the player stops playing the game and releases the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the starting position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the shooting of the game ball is stopped by pressing the shooting stop button 26e with a projection (not shown) of the handle grip 26d.

Here, as a method for increasing or decreasing the firing strength of the game ball, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b, and the firing solenoid (not shown) is changed. ) is known to increase or decrease the shooting intensity of a game ball by changing the power supplied to the power supply. and a gear mechanism (not shown) for winding up (tightening) the firing spring (not shown). In the shooting device 26, the amount of rotation of the hoisting gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip 26d of the shooting handle 26b, and the degree of hoisting (tightening) of the shooting spring is strengthened or weakened. The firing intensity of is changed to increase or decrease.

The speaker 10c is provided in the lower center of the body frame 2 so as to produce sound effects. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided at the portion of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, the portion between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). It's becoming

The game board 1 is arranged in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which a shot game ball can roll and flow down. are doing. The game board 1 is made of a translucent material (for example, polycarbonate), but may be made of a non-translucent material such as plywood.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first starting port 32, a second starting port 33, a blade member 34 for opening and closing the second starting port 33, a passage gate 35, The first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening 37, the first big winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first big winning opening 36, the second big winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second big winning opening 37, the second A specific area 38A and a non-specific area 38B positioned below the big winning opening 37, a displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific area 38A, a plurality of general winning openings 40, an out opening 41, an upper movable effect member 42A, a lower movable effect A member 42B, a cover member 43, a liquid crystal display device 4, and an LED unit 5 are provided. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the passage gate 35, the first big winning port 36, the second big winning port 37, the specific area 38A, and the general winning port 40 A winning area is formed by Note that FIG. 3 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed.

The guide rail 30 is composed of an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the body frame 2 and arranged so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged on the left side of the game board 1 inside the outer rail. The game board 1 is attached to the body frame 2 from the rear side thereof.

The stage 31 is arranged along the lower edge portion of the liquid crystal display device 4 to divide the game ball flow area in the game area 1p.

The game balls shot by the shooting device 26 collide with a game nail (not shown) driven into the game board 1, a stage 31, or the like, and flow down the game board 1 while changing their advancing direction. In this process, the game ball is collected by winning any one of the first starting hole 32, the second starting hole 33, the first big winning hole 36, the second big winning hole 37, and the general winning hole 40, and , is recovered by being discharged from an out port 41 when it does not win, or when it passes through the passage gate 35 and does not win after that.

Winning means that the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area, an advantageous situation for the player (for example, opening of the second start port 33, pattern lottery, prize ball, etc., which will be described later) is given. means to At this time, the passage of the game ball through the winning area means a mere passage, and the entry of the game ball into the winning area means that the game ball is collected separately from the out port 41, but both cases will be described later. Winning is detected when the game ball passes through the sensor switch, so passing and entering the ball are substantially synonymous. Therefore, since the passing of the game ball to the winning area and the entering of the ball lead to winning, the present embodiment will be described using the expression "winning" unless otherwise specified. Also, passing the game ball through the specific area 38A may be referred to as "V winning".

When the rotation angle of the shooting handle 26b is relatively small, the game ball mainly flows down the left side of the stage 31 because the hitting force applied to the game ball is generally small. Also, when the rotation angle of the shooting handle 26b is relatively large, the game ball mainly flows down the right side of the stage 31 because the hitting force given to the game ball is generally large. In general, a hitting method in which a game ball flows down to the left side of the stage 31 is called "left hitting", and a hitting method in which a game ball flows down to the right side of the stage 31 is called "right hitting".

The first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 provide a chance for a lottery on the condition that the game ball wins, and also provide a chance for displaying the result of the lottery on the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. It gives. In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 realize the first starting area and the second starting area.

The first starting port 32 is provided in the center of the game board 1 at a substantially lower position. When game balls enter the first starting port 32, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 17 or the lower tray 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21.例文帳に追加Winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected by the first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

The second starting port 33 is provided directly below the first starting port 32 . When game balls enter the second starting port 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 17 or the lower tray 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21.例文帳に追加The difficulty of winning the second starting port 33 is determined by the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory. Winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected by the second starting port switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

The blade member 34 opens and closes so as to form a forward tilting posture and a backward posture in the front and rear direction of the game board 1, and an open state that enables or facilitates the winning of the game ball to the second start port 33, It is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port 33 . The vane member 34 is driven by a vane member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

The normal electric accessory is not limited to one that opens and closes the wing member 34 in the front-rear direction. , or a tongue-like member that opens and closes the starting port by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1 .

The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33 . Winning of a game ball to the passage gate 35 is detected by the passage gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball enters the passage gate 35, no prize ball is generated.

The first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are opened during a winning game state (big winning game state) which is an advantageous state for the player. The first big winning opening 36 is located substantially on the right side of the first starting opening 32 and provided directly below the passage gate 35 . The second big prize winning opening 37 is located substantially on the right side of the second start opening 33 and provided directly below the first big winning opening 36 . It should be noted that the positions at which the first and second big winning holes 36 and 37 are arranged are not limited to the positions described above, and can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

The first big winning hole 36 is formed in the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large horizontal dimension so that a plurality of game balls can win simultaneously. A first big winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first big winning opening 36 is provided in the vicinity of the first big winning opening 36 . Winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 36 is detected by the first big winning hole count switch 360 (see FIG. 6).

The second big winning opening 37 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having relatively small vertical and horizontal dimensions so that game balls can win one by one. A second big winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second big winning opening 37 is provided in the vicinity of the second big winning opening 37 . Winning of the game ball into the second big winning hole 37 is detected by the second big winning hole count switch 370 (see FIG. 6).

The first big prize winning opening shutter 36A opens and closes so as to form a forward tilting posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, thereby switching the first big winning gate 36 to an open state or a closed state. It is arranged so as to cover the first big prize winning opening 36 in the closed state. That is, the first big winning hole shutter 36A is changed into an open state in which the game ball can or easily enter the first big winning hole 36 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot or cannot win a prize. It is driven by the first big winning opening shutter solenoid 360A (see FIG. 6).

The second big winning opening shutter 37A is for switching the second big winning opening 37 to an open state or a closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and the second big winning opening 37 is opened in the closed state. placed to cover. That is, the second large winning opening shutter 37A is changed to an open state in which the game ball can or easily enters the second large winning opening 37 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter. It is driven by the second big winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

The specified area 38A and the non-specified area 38B are areas through which the game ball that has won the second big winning hole 37 can pass afterward, and are covered with the cover member 43 . A ball passage for a game ball from the second big winning hole 37 to the specified area 38A and the non-specified area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the cover member 43 . A game ball that has won the second big winning hole 37 is guided behind the game board 1 and collected after passing through either the specified area 38A or the non-specified area 38B. A second big winning hole count switch 370 is arranged in the middle of the ball path from the second big winning hole 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and V winning of a game ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific region 38A is provided near the specific region 38A.

The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A between an open state and a closed state by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacement member 39 changes between an open state (first state) in which V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is possible or easy, and a closed state (second state) in which V winning is impossible or difficult. is driven by a displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 6). When the specific area 38A is in a closed state, the game ball that has become unable to win a V prize passes through the non-specific area 38B.

In the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, the first large winning opening 36, the first large winning opening shutter 36A, the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, and the first large winning opening count switch 360 operate as the first variable winning device. Realized. The second big winning opening 37, the second big winning opening shutter 37A, the second big winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the second big winning opening count switch 370 realize a second variable winning device.

One or more general winning holes 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1 . When a game ball wins in this general winning hole 40, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by a payout device 83 (see FIG. 6) although no lottery is performed. Winning of game balls into the general winning opening 40 is detected by general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

In the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, as a normal game state controlled by the main control circuit 60 to be described later, non-variable/non-time-saving game state and winning probability of special symbol lottery are non-variable/ A probability variable gaming state (special game state) that is higher than the non-shortening gaming state, a time-saving gaming state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-probability / non-time-saving gaming state, and a probability variable / time-saving gaming state (probable variable gaming state , and there is a normal game state that is a time-saving game state), and when a special symbol lottery is won in the normal game state, the game shifts to a jackpot game state (specific game state).

In the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high, so that the winning to the second starting port 33 is facilitated by the support of the wing member 34 as the normal electric throw. This state is a so-called "electric sapo" state, in which reserved balls for a special symbol game, which will be described later, are easily accumulated, and the loss of game balls can be suppressed by winning a prize in the second start port 33.例文帳に追加Specifically, the time-saving gaming state is a state in which the probability of winning a normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time-saving gaming state 1), a state in which the fluctuation time of special symbols and normal symbols is relatively short (time-saving gaming state 2 ), means at least one of the states in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as a normal electric accessory is relatively long (time saving game state 3). For example, the time-saving game state includes a state in which the time-saving game state 1, time-saving game state 2, and time-saving game state 3 progress simultaneously with any combination. In such a time-saving game state, the possibility of shifting to a big hit game state is improved.

After the jackpot game state in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is successful in the jackpot game state, the state is always shifted to the probability variable game state, and the state is not shifted to the non-probability variable game state. On the other hand, when the jackpot game state ends with non-V prize winning without succeeding in the V prize to the specific area 38A, the state shifts to the non-probability variable game state after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, 20 special symbol lotteries (variation display and stop display of 20 special symbols) are performed in the probability variation gaming state, and the game moves to the non-probability variation gaming state. The probability variation gaming state that ends by performing such a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries is also referred to as ST (Special Time) gaming state. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state, the variable probability game state may be maintained until the next jackpot game state is entered.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the specific jackpot game state, it is always shifted to the time-saving game state, it does not shift to the non-time-saving game state. On the other hand, after the end of the jackpot game state which is not a specific jackpot game state, the game is shifted to a non-time-saving game state. In addition, when 100 special symbol lotteries (variable display and stop display of 100 special symbols) are performed in the time-saving game state, the game is shifted to a non-time-saving game state. In addition, after the end of a specific jackpot game state, the time saving game state may be maintained until the next jackpot game state is entered.

The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are retracted behind the game board 1 when not in operation, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. are placed in The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the central portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and rotates and emits light. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower part of the display area 4A and emits light when a specific effect is performed.

The cover member 43 is provided in order to form the second big winning opening 37 and is attached below the first big winning opening 36 . The cover member 43 forms a second big prize winning opening 37 by opening a part of its upper end surface. In a state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1 , the displacement member 39 is positioned in the opening corresponding to the second big winning opening 37 . Further, a guide piece 43 a for guiding the game ball toward the second big winning opening 37 is provided on the front side edge of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 . Inside the cover member 43, a ball path is formed from an opening corresponding to the second big winning hole 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B through the second big winning hole count switch 370. Such a cover member 43 is arranged to cover the second big winning hole count switch 370, the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B.

The LED unit 5 notifies the player of each game state and lottery result, and as shown in FIG. It has a 2 special symbol display portion 54 , a first special symbol reservation display portion 55 , a second special symbol reservation display portion 56 and a round display portion 59 . Although not shown, the lamps/LEDs 27 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the game board 1 and the like include those corresponding to the character appearance notification lamps. Lights up (or flashes) when a special character (hereinafter also referred to as "SP character") appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in part of the variation of the special symbols in the game state or in the jackpot game state. It's like

The normal symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33 by driving the blade member 34 as the normal electric accessory when the game ball has won the passage gate 35. It displays the result of the lottery for "game". The normal symbol display section 51 includes one LED lamp 511 . The LED lamp 511 can, for example, light up in red and light up in blue, and in the normal symbol game, it lights up in red when it wins, and it lights in blue when it loses in the normal symbol game. When the lighting mode of the LED lamp 511 in the normal pattern display part 51 is, for example, a red lighting mode, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern to allow the game ball to enter the second start port 33. In addition, as the lighting mode according to winning and losing of the normal symbol game, other lighting modes may be used. can be

In the normal symbol holding display part 52, a new game ball enters the passage gate 35 while the normal symbol display part 51 is performing variable display by lighting or extinguishing the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524. In this case, the number of times of execution of variable display of normal symbols reserved for performing variable display by the normal symbol display unit 51 from the next time onward is displayed. The four LED lamps 521 , 522 , 523 , 524 are positioned on the left side of the normal symbol display section 51 and are arranged in a row together with the LED lamp 511 . In the pending display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524, for example, when the pending number is "1", the LED lamp 521 is lit and the LED lamps 522, 523, 524 are extinguished. When the pending number is "2", the LED lamps 521 and 522 are lit and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are extinguished. When the pending number is "3", the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 are lit and the LED lamp 524 is extinguished. When the pending number is "4", all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are lit.

The first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 indicate the result of the winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, 7-segment LEDs. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special symbol") serving as identification information triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32, and displays the first symbol. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning to the starting port 32 is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol relating to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbol") serving as identification information triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33, and displays the second special symbol. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning to the starting port 33 is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol relating to the second special symbol. In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54 implement identification information display means.

The variable display of the symbols by the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54 is performed, for example, by using a 7-segment LED or the like and repeating lighting and extinguishing of each segment individually. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on/off each segment of the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 . At this time, the plurality of winning symbols displayed as the first special symbols and the plurality of winning symbols displayed as the second special symbols are different from each other. As the hit pattern of the first special pattern, it is a pattern that triggers the transition to the big hit game state, and after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to shift to the probability change / time saving game state "big hit 1" to "big hit 4" (definite change Time-saving hit) jackpot pattern, and "jackpot 5" and "jackpot 6" (time-saving hit) jackpot patterns that can shift to a probability variable/non-time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state, and in principle after the jackpot game state ends There is a big hit pattern of "big hit 7" (normal hit) that shifts to a non-variable/non-time-saving game state (see FIG. 8). As the hit pattern of the second special pattern, it is a pattern that triggers the transition to the big hit game state, and "big hit 6" to "big hit 9" (time-saving middle hit) that can shift to the probability variable game state after the big hit game state ends. ) is a big hit pattern (see FIG. 8). In addition, the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 are not limited to the 7-segment LED or the like, and may be, for example, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

The first special symbol reservation display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554, and by lighting or extinguishing these LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554, the first special symbol display unit 53 Or for the variable display of the first special symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball has entered the first starting port 32 while the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying the variable symbols for the special symbol game. It displays the executable number of times (number of reservations) of the variable display of the first special symbol display portion 53 that is reserved. The second special symbol holding display portion 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, and by lighting or extinguishing these LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, the first special symbol display portion 53 Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 has won a new game ball in the second starting port 33 during the symbol variation display for the special symbol game, it is reserved for the symbol variation display for the special symbol game from the next time onwards. The executable number of times (number of reservations) of the variable display of the second special symbol display section 54 is displayed. Each of the first special symbol reservation display portion 55 and the second special symbol reservation display portion 56 is arranged vertically and positioned above the normal symbol reservation display portion 52 . The display mode of the number of reservations in the first special design reservation display section 55 and the second special design reservation display section 56 is the same as the display manner of the number of reservations by the normal design reservation display section 52 .

The first special symbol reserved display portion 55 and the second special symbol reserved display portion 56 are displayed to the first start port 32 while the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 is displayed in a variable manner. A game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to it, or the second starting port switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second starting port 33 If so, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 is suspended. When the symbol that has been variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 is stopped and displayed, the reserved first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 Variation display of the pattern is started.

Here, an upper limit is set to the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 is suspended. The number of suspensions of the variable display of the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 due to the winning of the game ball to the second start port 33 is four at maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display portion 53 is suspended four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol display portion 53 during fluctuation is stored in the main RAM 63 (Fig. 6) is stored as start memory (start memory information) in the first special symbol start storage area (0), and the information of the first special symbol game for four times held is stored in the first special symbol start storage area ( 1) ~ 1st special symbol start storage area (4) is stored as start memory. Similarly, when the second special symbol game is suspended four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol during fluctuation is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 ( 0) is stored as start memory (start memory information), and the information of the second special symbol game for four times that is held is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4 ) as a starting memory. Therefore, both the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54, that is, the number of pending winnings to the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is eight in total.

In addition, instead of the first special symbol reservation display portion 55 and the second special symbol reservation display portion 56, or in addition to the first special symbol reservation display portion 55 and the second special symbol reservation display portion 56, in the liquid crystal display device 4 , the suspension of winning to the first starting port 32 and the suspension of winning to the second starting port 33 may be displayed.

The round display portion 59 is lit while the winning symbols are stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of round games to be described later when the big winning game state is executed. The round display portion 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the jackpot game state is executed by turning on or off the LED lamps 591, 592, 593. In the present embodiment, when the number of rounds is 12 rounds (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "12R"), the LED lamp 591 is lit and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are extinguished. Also, for example, in the present embodiment, when setting a jackpot game state with a number of rounds different from the number of rounds described above, the LED lamp 592 or 593 is lit and the other LED lamps are turned off. can be done. The number of rounds (number of rounds) may mean the total number of round games (round games) executed, or may mean an order number indicating the order in which the round games are executed sequentially. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, "12th round" or "12R" is written, and when the latter is meant, for example, it is written as "12th R". Also, in the following description, "round game" may be simply referred to as "round".

As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged behind the game board 1, and has a display area 4A arranged substantially in the center thereof so as to be visible to the player. In addition to the result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, various images related to the game, such as identification patterns for production, production images in the normal game state, and production in the jackpot game state. It displays images, effect images for demonstration display, and the like. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 performs variable display of the identification information on the condition that the game ball has won the first starting hole 32 or the second starting hole 33 . In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes effect display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and lamps/LEDs 27 constitute effect execution means. In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, these effect execution means are also used as notification means.

[Electrical Configuration of Game Machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the control circuit of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment will be described. In FIG. 6, "switch" is abbreviated as "SW" and "solenoid" is abbreviated as "SOL".

As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko game machine comprises a main control circuit 60 as main control means for controlling the game, and a sub-control circuit 70 as sub-control means for controlling the performance according to the progress of the game. have.

The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 that is a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 that is a readable/writable memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I/O port 65, a command output port 66 as command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. It has The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (equipment, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5 .

The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63 and has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 62 . In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the main CPU 61 implements advantageous state determination means (specific game state transition determination means), specific game state control means, special game state control means, and round game execution means.

The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first starting port switch 320 arranged behind the first starting port 32 . When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 320, the main CPU 61 performs a winning lottery. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to give an advantageous state.

The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second starting port switch 330 arranged behind the second starting port 33 . When the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 330, the main CPU 61 performs a winning lottery. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to give an advantageous state.

These first start port switch 320 and second start port switch 330, the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 when it is detected that the game ball has entered the winning, and a predetermined detection signal It is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

A pass gate switch 350 arranged behind the pass gate 35 is connected to the main control circuit 60 . When the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 350, it is assumed that the game ball has entered the passage gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of this normal symbol lottery is displayed in the normal symbol display portion 51 . When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 51, an effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 so that the player can understand that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning. You may do so.

The passage gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that the game ball has won a prize when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 35.例文帳に追加Thereby, the passage gate switch 350 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33 .

The main control circuit 60 is connected to a left general winning opening switch 400A and a right normal winning opening switch 400B arranged behind the general winning openings 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1 . When game balls are detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, the number of prize balls set in advance by the payout device 83 is performed.

The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first big winning hole count switch 360 arranged behind the first big winning hole 36 . The first big winning hole count switch 360 is for counting the number of game balls entering the first big winning hole 36 . When the winning of the game balls is detected by the first big winning hole count switch 360, the payout device 83 selects a preset number of game balls as prize balls and supplies them to the upper tray 17 or the lower tray 17 through the payout hole 20 or the supply hole 21. A dish 18 is dispensed.

The main control circuit 60 is connected with a second big winning hole count switch 370 arranged behind the second big winning hole 37 . The second big winning hole count switch 370 is for counting the winning number of game balls to the second big winning hole 37 . When the winning of game balls is detected by the second big winning hole count switch 370, the payout device 83 selects a preset number of game balls as prize balls and supplies them to the upper tray 17 through the payout hole 20 or the supply hole 21. Alternatively, the lower tray 18 is dispensed.

These first big winning hole count switch 360 and second big winning hole count switch 370 mainly control a predetermined detection signal when a game ball passes through the first big winning hole 36 and second big winning hole 37. feed circuit 60;

The main control circuit 60 is connected to specific area switches 380A and non-specific area switches 380B arranged in the specific area 38A and non-specific area 38B. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as V winning when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A in the jackpot game state. The non-specific area switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as non-V winning when detecting that the game ball has passed through the non-specific area 38B in the jackpot game state.

The main control circuit 60 includes a first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A that drives a first large winning opening shutter 36A that opens and closes the first large winning opening 36, and a second large winning opening shutter that opens and closes the second large winning opening 37. It exclusively controls the second big winning opening shutter solenoid 370A that drives 37A. As a result, the first big winning opening shutter 36A is changed into an open state in which the game ball can or easily enters the first big winning opening 36 and a closed state in which the game ball cannot or cannot enter the first big winning opening 36. , and in a situation where the first big winning hole 36 is at least closed, the second big winning hole shutter 37A is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second big winning hole 37, It is driven to change to a closed state in which winning of game balls is impossible or difficult. The opening driving of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 by such a first big winning opening shutter 36A and second big winning opening shutter 37A is performed by the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display. In the part 54, the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode, and it is carried out when the state is shifted to the jackpot game state.

The main control circuit 60 controls a blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34 . As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined light emission mode in the normal symbol display portion 51, the blade member 34 is opened only for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball enters the second starting port 33. becomes easier.

For example, in the normal symbol game of the present embodiment, the normal symbol hit probability in the game state (that is, "low probability") is 1/65536 (see FIG. 8), and in most cases the blade member 34 is never released. On the other hand, the normal pattern hit probability in the time-saving game state (that is, "high probability") is 65534/65536 (see FIG. 8), and in most cases the blade member 34 is opened three times for 1.3 seconds. In addition, the winning probability of normal symbols in a game state (that is, "low probability") that is not a time-saving game state may be set to 0 (that is, non-winning is determined without lottery). Also, the winning probability of normal symbols in the time-saving gaming state (that is, "at the time of high probability") may be set to 1 (that is, winning is determined without lottery).

The main control circuit 60 controls a displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific area 38A. As a result, when a round game, which will be described later, is being executed in the jackpot game state, the displacement member 39 is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times, making it possible or easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A. Become. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed even in the jackpot game state, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specified area 38A, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specified area 38B.

The first special symbol reserve display unit 55, while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed in a variable manner, when the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 320, the second Until the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is being changed and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54, is stopped and displayed, the first number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is displayed. Display the number of pending execution (start) of the variable display of the special symbols, that is, the number of pending according to the first special symbol. When the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stop-displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol reserved as the number of reservations related to the first special symbol is started.

The second special symbol reservation display unit 56, while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed in a variable manner, when the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 330, the second Until the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is being changed and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54, is stopped and displayed, the second second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is displayed. Display the number of pending execution (start) of the variable display of special symbols, that is, the number of pending according to the second special symbol. When the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stop-displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol reserved as the number of reservations related to the second special symbol is started.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the order of priority of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, according to the winning order to the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33, the corresponding first special symbols and second special symbols may be variably displayed according to the winning order.

In addition, as described above, the upper limit is set to the number of suspensions for which the execution of the variable display of special symbols is suspended. When the game ball wins and the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the number of holdings of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 4 at maximum. (that is, 4 times of detection) are stored, and the fifth and subsequent ones are not stored as the pending number. At this time, when the number of reservations is reduced due to the end of the variable display of the special symbols, the number of reservations is added again with an upper limit of four.

When the number of reserved first special symbol games in the first special symbol display portion 53 is suspended up to, for example, four, the special symbol game information corresponding to the first special symbol display portion 53 during fluctuation is 1 special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as start memory, after that, the information of the special symbol game with the number of reservations of 4 is stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. It is stored sequentially as a starting memory.

Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display portion 54, when the number of pending second special symbol games is suspended up to, for example, four, the number corresponding to the second special symbol display portion 54 during fluctuation is The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63 as a start memory, and thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game with the holding number of 4 is stored in the second special symbol game of the main RAM 63. 2 Special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as starting memory.

Therefore, the number of reserved game balls related to the special symbol game associated with the winning of the first start port 32 and the second start port 33 is a maximum of 8 in total, and the first special symbol reservation display unit 54 and the second special symbol The number of pending displays by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the pending display unit 55 is also four.

In the open state of the first big winning opening 36 by the first big winning opening shutter 36A, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the first big winning opening count switch 360 becomes a predetermined number (for example, 8 winning numbers). , or until a predetermined opening time, which will be described later, elapses. When the winning number of game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first big winning opening shutter 36A has passed, the first big winning opening shutter 36A is driven to close the first big winning opening 36. be done.

Similarly, in the open state of the second large winning opening 37 by the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winning game balls) by the second large winning opening count switch 370 is a predetermined number (for example, 8 winning numbers). or until a predetermined opening time, which will be described later, elapses. When the winning number of game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second large winning opening shutter 37A elapses, the second large winning opening shutter 37A is driven to close the second large winning opening 37. be done.

In the jackpot game state, the first and second jackpots 36 and 37 are repeatedly opened and closed based on a preset jackpot opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) to be described later. In the jackpot game state, a game in which the first and second jackpots 36 and 37 are opened and closed for a predetermined number of times, including a plurality of times, based on a jackpot opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) to be described later. is called a "round game". A round game (round game) may simply be called a round. After the first big prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37 is closed by one round game, the first big prize opening 36 or the second big prize opening 37 is opened in the next round game. The state up to is also referred to as "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval" or simply "interval". In one round game, the first big prize winning opening 36 and the second big winning prize opening 37 may be in the open state and the closed state for a plurality of times. In addition, in one round game, the opening/closing states of the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize winning opening 37 are exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big winning hole is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big winning hole is continuously closed.

It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is not provided with a so-called small winning game state as a game state different in nature from the big winning game state, but may be provided with a small winning game state. Unlike the big-hit game state, the small-hit game state is not defined by the concept of a round game. However, when a small winning game state is provided, any or a specific large winning opening may be controlled to be repeatedly opened over a plurality of times. Further, the game state after the end of the small winning game state may be shifted to a game state different from the game state before shifting to the small winning game state, and the game state before shifting to the small winning game state. may be returned to

A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be called the first round, and the second round game may be called the second round. In the following description (including drawings to be referred to with the description), numbered "rounds" such as 1 round or 1st round are simply "R ] In addition, in one round game, before the first big prize hole 36 or the second big prize hole 37 is opened a predetermined number of times, the maximum number of prizes per round is reached. When it reaches, the first big winning hole 36 and the second big winning hole 37 are closed, and the first big winning hole 36 and the second big winning hole 37 are not opened for the remaining number of openings. , the round game is terminated.

Further, in a specific round game in which the second big winning hole 37 is open in the jackpot game state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern), which will be described later. Thereby, 38 A of specific areas will be in an open state and a closed state in the specific round game of a jackpot game state. That is, in a specific round game, it is possible that a game ball passes through the specific area 38A and wins a V prize. Even if it does, it will be in a state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A. That is, the types of the jackpot game state (specific game state) include a jackpot game state (first specific game state) including a specific round game and a jackpot game state (second specific game state) that does not include a specific round game. There is.

In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, effect images related to the special symbols displayed in the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 are displayed. For example, during the variable display of the special symbols displayed in the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 consists of numbers, except for specific cases. Designs (decorative designs), for example, numbers such as '0', '1', '2', . . . '7' are displayed in three rows.

On the other hand, when the special symbols variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54 are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols are also stopped and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

In addition, in the first special symbol display part 53 and the second special symbol display part 54, when the special symbols changed and stopped are in a specific stop display mode, the player is made to understand that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. FIG.

Specifically, in either one of the first special symbol display portion 53 and the second special symbol display portion 54, the special symbol is, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to a "jackpot" in which a large number of balls can be obtained. When the stop display is performed, the combination of decorative patterns for effect displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is in a specific display mode (for example, a state in which all of the same patterns are aligned in each of a plurality of pattern rows). ), and the effect image for the big win is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. FIG.

The main CPU 61 included in such a main control circuit 60 enters a specific game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player on the condition that the game medium has passed through the first start area (first start port 32). It functions as a first specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player on condition that the game medium has passed through the second start area (second start port 33). It functions as second specific game state transition determination means.

Further, the main CPU 61 controls the game state to the specific game state on the condition that the first or second specific game state transition determination means obtains a determination result to the effect that the game state is shifted to the specific game state. function as

Further, the main CPU 61, on the condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area 38A in the specific game state, after the specific game state ends, the specific game state transition determination means determines that the main CPU 61 shifts to the specific game state. functions as special game state control means for controlling to a special game state (probability variable game state) that is relatively easy to obtain.

In addition, the main CPU 61, in the specific game state, changes the first variable winning device (first big winning opening shutter 36A) between the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in the first round game (round game) for a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61 functioning as first round game executing means is capable of controlling the first variable winning device to vary between the first mode and the second mode during execution of at least one first round game.

In addition, the main CPU 61, in the specific game state, performs a second round game (round game) for a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61 functioning as a second round game execution means controls the second variable prize winning device to operate in a specific round game mode in which passage of game media to the specific area 38A is relatively easy during execution of at least one second round game. It is possible to perform a specific second round game in which control is performed to vary between the first mode and the second mode. Also, during the execution of at least one other round game, the second variable winning device is varied between the first mode and the second mode in a predetermined round game mode in which it is relatively difficult for the game medium to pass through the specific area 38A. Control is also possible.

In addition, the jackpot game state is defined as a first specific game in which the first round game is executed a specific number of times by the first round game execution means and at least one specific second round game is executed by the second round game execution means. A game state and a second specific game state in which a specific number of first round games are executed by the first round game executing means and no specific second round game is executed by the second round game executing means.

A specific example of the control of the main CPU 61 that implements each means described above will be described later.

The main ROM 62 stores programs and various tables for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes described later, including the functions of the main CPU 61 described above.

The main RAM 63 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 61 and has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.). As a temporary storage area for the main CPU 61, instead of the main RAM 63, another readable and writable storage medium can be used.

The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61 .

The I/O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub control circuit 70 .

The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when power is cut off.

Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include the first big prize opening shutter solenoid 360A, the second big prize opening shutter solenoid 370A, the blade member solenoid 340, the displacement member solenoid 390, and the external terminal plate 80. .

The external terminal board 80 is connected to a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, or an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko machines installed in the hall. for data communication.

The various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first starter switch 320, a second starter switch 330, a passage gate switch 350, a first big win count switch 360, and a second big win count switch 370. , a specific area switch 380A, a non-specific area switch 380B, a general winning opening left switch 400A, a general winning opening right switch 400B, and a backup clear switch 81.

The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and the later-described payout/fire control circuit 82 at the time of power failure or the like according to the operation of the hall manager.

Also, the main control circuit 60 is connected to the ejection device 26 , the ejection device 83 , and the card unit 84 via the ejection/emission control circuit 82 .

The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout/launch control circuit 82 . The dispensing/emission control circuit 82 mainly controls the ejection device 26 and the ejection device 83, and the ejection device 26, the ejection device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected. In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the payout/launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 implement game value imparting means.

The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of game balls according to the player's operation, and can transmit and receive signals to and from the ball lending operation panel 85. .

The payout/launch control circuit 82 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and the ball rental control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. causes the payout device 83 to pay out game balls. The payout device 83, for example, pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning to the first starting port 32, and three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning to the second starting port 33. is paid out, and the number of prize balls per winning to the general winning opening 40 is 4 or 3 (for example, 4 in the case of winning at the general winning opening 40 located on the left side of the game board 1, In the case of winning a prize, 3 game balls are paid out to the general winning hole 40 located on the right side, and 14 game balls are played as the number of winning balls per winning to the first big winning hole 36 or the second big winning hole 37. pay out the ball

The payout/shooting control circuit 82 activates a shooting solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the shooting handle 26b of the shooting device 26 is gripped by the player and rotated clockwise. is supplied with electric power, and control is performed to shoot the game ball toward the game area 1p.

The main CPU 61 interrupts the main processing and executes timer interrupt processing as interrupt processing even during execution of the main processing, which will be described later. The timer interrupt process is triggered by an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

The sub-control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60 and configured to receive commands from the main control circuit 60 .

The sub-control circuit 70 performs various controls according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and includes a sub-CPU 71, program ROM 72, work RAM 73, command input port 74, backup capacitor 75, display control. It has a circuit 76 , an audio control circuit 77 , a lamp control circuit 78 and a movable effect device control circuit 79 . The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76 . Speakers 10 a , 10 b and 10 c are connected to the audio control circuit 77 . The lamp/LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78 . The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to the movable effect device 42 having motors, mechanisms, etc. for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

Further, the sub-control circuit 70 is connected to a depression operation button switch 90A provided to the depression operation button 9A and to a jog dial switch 90B provided to the jog dial 9B. The push operation button switch 90A detects the operation of the push operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub-control circuit 70 is supplied with a depression operation signal from the depression operation button switch 90A, and is supplied with a rotation operation signal from the jog dial switch 90B. The push-down operation button 9A and the jog dial 9B function as an operation means capable of receiving an operation related to the performance of the player.

The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 72 . The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as effect display means, and the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c function as music output means. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60 . In the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 implements effect control means for controlling each function related to such effects. The program ROM 72 and work RAM 73 implement storage means.

In addition, the liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a symbol variation display means in a symbol variation display area 700, which will be described later, and as a reservation information display means, in a first reserved ball display area 701 and a second reserved ball display area 702, which will be described later. It functions as the variation information display means in the variation reserved ball display area 703 which will be described later. In addition, it functions as first information display means for displaying first information (holding balls to be described later) in a first holding ball display area 701, a second holding ball display area 702, and a variable holding ball display area 703, which will be explained later. do. It also functions as second information display means for displaying second information (items to be described later) in the item display area 800 .

Further, the sub CPU 71 functions as a prefetching expectation degree notification effect means for controlling a prefetching pending change effect described later, functions as a variation expectation degree notification effect means for controlling the variable pending change effect described later, and functions as a first It functions as first display mode determination means for determining the display mode of the information (holding ball), and functions as second display mode determination means for determining the display mode of the second information (item).

A specific example of the control of the sub CPU 71 that implements each of the means described above will be described later.

The program ROM 72 stores programs and various tables for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects.

The work RAM 73 serves as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 71 and stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.).

The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71 .

The backup capacitor 75 is for retaining various data stored in the work RAM 73 by quickly supplying power to the work RAM 73 when power is cut off.

The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 71, and includes, for example, an image data processor (VDP) and a controller for generating various image data. It consists of an image data ROM storing data, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and a D/A converter for converting image data into image signals. Note that the configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer according to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71 . The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

Also, the display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies this image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. An image is displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the image signal from the D/A converter.

The audio control circuit 77 is for controlling sounds (sounds, music, etc.) to be output from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. ROM, contains an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying the sound signal. Note that the configuration of the audio control circuit 77 is also merely an example, and is not limited to this.

The sound source IC controls sounds to be output from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c. Sound data can be selected.

Also, the sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. Note that this amplifier amplifies sound signals and outputs sounds from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c.

The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamps/LEDs 27 including decorative lamps and the like, and includes a drive circuit for supplying lamp control signals, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. consists of The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is also merely an example, and is not limited to this.

For example, in the jackpot game state, the movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (swings) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by operating the depression operation button 9A or the like during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9. etc.) is controlled.

[Game state and effect mode of gaming machine]
Next, the game state and effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The game state is controlled by the main CPU 61 and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71 .

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game states other than the jackpot game state include a non-probability/non-time-saving game state (normal game state), a probability/non-time-saving game state, a non-probability/time-saving game state, and a probability/time-saving game. The state is implemented, and in FIG. 7, the non-probability / non-time-saving gaming state is indicated as "non-probability & non-time-saving", the probability-non-time-saving gaming state is indicated as "probability 20 times", and the non-probability / time-saving gaming state is indicated as "time saving 100 times", and the probability variation/time saving game state is indicated as "probability variation 20 times & time saving 100 times". Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a normal mode, a special mode, and a RUSH mode as presentation modes for game states other than the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the jackpot game state is a jackpot game state due to the first special symbol hit, which is a variable probability short hit 12R, a probability variable short hit 8R-1, a probability variable short hit 8R-2, a probability variable short hit. 4R, probability variation per 4R-1, probability variation per 4R-2, and normal per 8R, jackpot game state by second special symbol per, time-saving middle hit 12R-1, time-saving middle hit 12R-2, time-saving middle hit 8R, And the short time per 4R is implemented (see FIG. 8), and in FIG. ”, 4R-1 per probability and 4R-2 per probability are indicated as “during per probability”, 8R per normal is indicated as “normal per”, 12R-1 per time reduction, 12R-2 per time reduction, 8R during the time reduction and 4R during the time reduction are shown as "during the time reduction". In addition, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 7, a plurality of performance modes are implemented as the performance mode of the jackpot game state.

The normal mode is a production mode corresponding to a non-probability variable/non-time-saving gaming state, and is a special mode, a RUSH mode, or a production mode that stays when none of the hits are in progress. For example, in the special mode, when 20 special symbol games are completed, the special mode is switched to the normal mode. Also, in the RUSH mode, when 100 special symbol games are completed, the RUSH mode is shifted to the normal mode. In addition, when the big win game state ends due to non-V winning during the variable probability winning state shifted from the normal mode, the mode is shifted from the variable probability winning state to the normal mode. In addition, when the big win game state ends with a non-V win during the normal win after shifting from the normal mode, the normal mode shifts from the normal win.

In addition, in the normal mode, when the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the starting memory information of the first special symbol described above, the probability variable short time, which is the jackpot game state by the first special symbol hit. During the hit, during the probability variation hit, or during the normal hit shifts. Although not shown in FIG. 7, in the normal mode, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the starting memory information of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is displayed. There is also a case where the game shifts to a time-saving mid-hit state, which is a big hit game state by winning two special symbols.

In addition, as a specific display mode of the decorative pattern in the normal mode, one of the combination modes of "1" to "7" is stopped and displayed. Then, it is determined that the jackpot pattern corresponds to the first special pattern "jackpot 1" (hit pattern 1). In addition, when the combination mode of "1", "3" or "5" is stopped and displayed, the jackpot corresponding to the first special symbol "jackpot 2" to "jackpot 4" (hit patterns 2 to 4). There is a high possibility that it is a pattern (that is, the degree of expectation for shifting to RUSH mode is high), and it is possible that it is a jackpot pattern corresponding to the first special pattern "jackpot 5" to "jackpot 7" (hit patterns 4 to 7). (ie, low expectations of transitioning to RUSH mode). In addition, when it is stopped and displayed as another combination mode, there is a high possibility that it is a jackpot pattern corresponding to the first special pattern "jackpot 5" to "jackpot 7" (hit patterns 4 to 7) (that is, Expectation to shift to RUSH mode is low), the possibility that it is a jackpot pattern corresponding to the first special pattern "jackpot 2" to "jackpot 4" (hit patterns 2 to 4) is low (that is, shift to RUSH mode low expectations to do so). However, if a specific character pattern other than a number is further provided as a decorative pattern and is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of this specific character pattern, there is a possibility that it may be any of the first special patterns. may In addition, as described above, in the normal mode, when shifting to the time-saving middle hit, which is the jackpot game state by the second special symbol hit, at least after the jackpot is completed, it shifts to the RUSH mode. Alternatively, the combination mode of "7" may be stop-displayed as the combination mode of the decorative patterns, or the combination mode of the decorative patterns may be stop-displayed in the same configuration as in the later-described special mode or RUSH mode. can be

The normal stage and special stage of the normal mode are the production stages that are the elements that determine the production mode in the non-variable/non-time-saving gaming state, and the special mode, RUSH mode, during the variable probability, and during the normal winning, transition to the normal mode. In this case, the special stage is first shifted to, and when 10 special symbol games are completed in the special stage, the special stage is shifted to the normal stage. For example, the normal stage and the special stage differ in one or more of the decorative design image data, the background image data, the frequency of effects, the appearance rate of specific effects, and the like. In addition, the normal stage and the special stage are mutually shifted when other transition conditions such as the result of the jackpot determination being a predetermined result or the passage of a predetermined predetermined time are established. You may do so. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game of the player who is playing the game in the normal mode.

The special mode is a production mode corresponding to the probability variable / non-time-saving game state, and when the big hit game state ends with V winning during the probability variable hit shifted from the normal mode, or during the normal hit shifted from the normal mode , it is a production mode that shifts when the big win game state ends with V winning. Also, the special mode ends when 20 special symbol games are completed without transitioning to the jackpot game state. Further, in the special mode, when the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the starting memory information of the first special symbols, the game shifts to the jackpot game state by winning the first special symbols. Also, although not shown in FIG. 7, based on the above-described starting memory information of the second special symbol, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode, the second special symbol per It shifts to the jackpot game state by. In the special mode, after all of these jackpot game states (“during promotion” in FIG. 7) are completed, the game shifts to the RUSH mode.

As for the specific display mode of the decorative patterns in the special mode, the combination mode of the decorative patterns may be stop-displayed in the same manner as in the above-described normal mode. When the "jackpot 1" (hit pattern 1) (or the second special pattern "jackpot 6" and "jackpot 7" (hit patterns 8 and 9)) is determined, the decorative pattern combination mode is " 7” is stopped and displayed, and the first special symbols “jackpot 2” to “jackpot 6” (hit patterns 2 to 6) (or second special patterns “jackpot 8” and “jackpot 9” (hit When the patterns 10 and 11)) are determined, the combinations of "1", "3" and "5" are likely to be stopped and displayed, and the other combinations are less likely to be stopped. However, when the first special symbol "jackpot 7" (hit pattern 7) is determined, other combination modes are likely to be stop-displayed as the combination modes of the decorative symbols, such as "1", "3" or " 5” may be made difficult to be stopped and displayed, and the degree of expectation of the presence or absence of the variable probability gaming state when shifting to the RUSH mode may be suggested.

RUSH mode is a production mode corresponding to the probability variable / time saving game state or non-probability change / time saving game state, and when the big hit game state ends during the probability change / time reduction game state that has been transferred from the normal mode, during the promotion that has been transferred from the special mode , or when the big win game state ends during a time-saving medium hit after shifting from any mode, the production mode shifts to. In addition, the RUSH mode ends when 100 special symbol games are completed without transitioning to the jackpot game state, regardless of whether the game is in the variable probability/time-saving game state or in the non-variable/time-saving game state.

Also, in the RUSH mode, when the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode based on the starting memory information of the second special symbol described above, it is a big hit game state due to the second special symbol. The game shifts to the hit mode, and after the end of the time saving hit mode, it shifts to the RUSH mode again. Although illustration is omitted in FIG. 7, in the RUSH mode, based on the start memory information of the above-mentioned first special symbol, when the combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as a specific display mode, the second Although there is a case of shifting to a big win game state by winning one special symbol, after this big win game state ends, the game shifts to the RUSH mode again.

In addition, as a specific display mode of the decorative patterns in the RUSH mode, the combination mode of the decorative patterns may be stop-displayed in the same configuration as in the above-described normal mode or special mode. If the special symbols "jackpot 6" and "jackpot 7" (win patterns 8 and 9) (or the first special pattern "jackpot 1" (hit pattern 1)) are determined, a combination of decorative patterns. When the combination mode of "7" is stop-displayed as a mode and the second special symbol "jackpot 8" (hit pattern 10) is determined, the combination mode of decorative symbols is "1", "3" or The combination mode of '5' is likely to be stop-displayed, the other combination modes are less likely to be stop-displayed, and when other jackpots are determined, the other combination modes are more likely to be stop-displayed as the combination mode of decorative patterns. , ``1'', ``3'' or ``5'' may be made difficult to be stop-displayed to indicate the actual number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state in the RUSH mode.

The battle effect section of the RUSH mode is executed after shifting to the RUSH mode, and basically continues until 87 special symbol games are completed. In this battle production section, a production is executed to display a battle scene between an ally character (protagonist character) and an enemy character (competing character). The result of big hit determination is reported by executing a battle performance with the character and displaying the win or loss. In addition, when a winning effect is executed in a specific battle effect (for example, "race battle reach" or "special character battle reach" described later), the history (victory character history) is stored, and the winning The player is provided with music related to the fighting character. In the RUSH mode, the player can arbitrarily select acquired songs (acquired songs) and play the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of enemy characters that give rise to a common idea are set as fighting characters. Specifically, for example, 12 battle characters (characters 1 to 12) that give rise to common ideas such as 12 zodiac signs, 12 constellations, or January to December are set, and the degree of continuation of RUSH mode (that is, Depending on the number of hits in a row during the RUSH mode, the degree of achievement of winning characters and acquired songs is updated, or a series of stories progresses, making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, in the battle production section of the RUSH mode, regardless of whether the gaming state is a variable probability gaming state, the production content is determined in the same way, and the variation pattern is also determined in the same way. (See FIG. 12). That is, the battle production section of the RUSH mode can be executed across between the probability variation/time saving gaming state and the non-probability variation/time saving gaming state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation during the RUSH mode, regardless of whether or not the game is in the variable probability game state, and to increase the interest in the game.

The transformation effect section of the RUSH mode is executed after the battle effect section of the RUSH mode ends, and basically continues until the end of the RUSH mode. In this transformation effect section, in the 88th to 99th special pattern games during the RUSH mode, the above-mentioned 12 fighting characters appear one by one, and whether or not the appearing fighting characters transform (that is, the character's The result of the big hit determination is reported depending on whether the display mode changes or not. In addition, in the 100th special pattern game during the RUSH mode, the above-described main character appears, and whether or not the main character that has appeared transforms (that is, whether or not the display mode of the character changes) determines whether the big hit is determined. Results are reported.

During the variable time short hit, as described above, in the normal mode, it is a jackpot game state by the first special symbol hit, the short time variable probability hit 12R, the short time short hit 8R-1, the short time short hit 8R-2, or the short time short hit This indicates that the transition to 4R has been made. During the probability variable time short winning, when the big win game state ends with V winning, it shifts to the RUSH mode as the probability variable / time saving game state, and when the big win game state ends with non-V winning, Shift to the RUSH mode as a non-variable/time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that during the probability variable time reduction hit, for example, a plurality of production modes with different selection probabilities depending on the type of big hit may be set.

As described above, during the probability variation indicates that the normal mode has shifted to the probability variation 4R-1 or the probability variation 4R-2, which is the jackpot game state by the first special symbol per. In addition, during the normal winning, as described above, in the normal mode, it indicates that the state has shifted to the normal winning 8R, which is the big winning game state by the first special symbol winning. When the big win game state ends with V winning during the variable probability winning or the normal winning, the machine shifts to a special mode as a variable probability/non-time-saving game state, and ends the big winning game state with non-V winning. In that case, it shifts to the normal mode as a non-probable variable/non-time-saving gaming state.

During the promotion hit, as described above, in the special mode, indicates that it has shifted to one of the jackpot game states. During the promotion, if the big hit game state ends with a V prize, it shifts to the RUSH mode as a probability variable / time saving game state, and if the big win game state ends with a non-V prize, the non-V prize is won. Shift to the RUSH mode as a probability variable/time-saving game state. During promotion, for example, a plurality of performance modes with different selection probabilities may be set depending on the type of big win.

During the time-saving hit, as described above, in the RUSH mode, it is a jackpot game state by the second special symbol hit, which is the time-saving hit 12R-1, the time-saving hit 12R-2, the time-saving hit 8R, or the time-short hit. This indicates that the transition to 4R has been made. During the time-saving middle hit, when the big win game state ends with V winning, it shifts to the RUSH mode as a variable probability/time saving game state, and when the big win game state ends with no V winning, Shift to the RUSH mode as a non-variable/time-saving gaming state. In addition, during the time-saving medium hit, for example, a plurality of production modes with different selection probabilities may be set depending on the type of big win.

It should be noted that, even if illustration and explanation are not shown, it is possible to switch between each effect mode with the transition of the game state, etc., and the range is not limited to the illustration and explanation.

[Game machine specs]
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, specs relating to the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the special symbol is 1/149.97 (437/65536) at the time of low probability (non-variable gaming state), and at the time of high probability (variable gaming state ) is 1/19.56 (3351/65536). As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is preferentially digested. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), the ST gaming state in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 20 times as the number of games (variation number of special symbols) is implemented.

The distribution of special patterns is as follows. That is, the jackpot pattern "jackpot 1" of the first special pattern has a jackpot opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) as hit pattern 1, and the number of rounds of the round game is 12R (of which, the actual number of rounds that are easy to win the jackpot is 12R) is provided, the round in which V winning is easy is set to the 4th round, and after the big hit game state is finished, the time saving game state is entered (probability variable time saving win 12R). The probability of "jackpot 1" as the jackpot pattern of the first special pattern (rush rate) is set to 12/100.

The jackpot pattern ``jackpot 2'' of the first special pattern becomes the hit pattern 2, the number of rounds is 8R (the number of rounds is actually 4R), and the round in which V winning is easy is set to the 4th round, and the jackpot game state is established. After the end, it becomes a time-saving game state (probability variable time-saving per 8R-1). The entry rate of the jackpot symbol "jackpot 2" of the first special symbol is set to 3/100.

The jackpot pattern "jackpot 3" of the first special pattern becomes the hit pattern 3, the number of rounds is 8R (the number of rounds is actually 4R), and the round in which V winning is easy is set to the 4th round, and the jackpot game state is established. After the end, it becomes a time-saving game state (per probability variable time-saving 8R-2). The entry rate of the jackpot symbol "jackpot 3" of the first special symbol is set to 2/100.

The jackpot pattern ``jackpot 4'' of the first special pattern becomes a hit pattern 4, the number of rounds 4R (the number of actual rounds is 4R among them) is given, the round in which the V prize is easy to win is set to the 4th round, and the jackpot game state is established. After the end, it becomes a time-saving game state (probability variable time-saving per 4R). The entry rate of the jackpot symbol "jackpot 4" of the first special symbol is set to 3/100.

The jackpot pattern "jackpot 5" of the first special pattern becomes the hit pattern 5, the number of rounds 4R (of which the actual number of rounds is 4R) is given, and the round that makes it easy to win a V prize is set to the 4th round. After the jackpot game state shifted from the time-saving game state is ended, the time-saving game state is not entered and the non-time-saving game state is entered. However, after the end of the non-variable / time-saving game state, the probability / non-time-saving game state, and the big hit game state shifted from the probability / non-time-saving game state, it becomes a time-saving game state (variable probability 4R-1). The entry rate of the jackpot symbol "jackpot 5" of the first special symbol is set to 20/100.

The jackpot pattern "jackpot 6" of the first special pattern becomes the hit pattern 6, the number of rounds 4R (of which the actual number of rounds is 4R) is given, and the round that makes it easy to win a V prize is set to the 4th round. After the jackpot game state shifted from the time-saving game state is ended, the time-saving game state is not entered and the non-time-saving game state is entered. However, after the end of the non-variable / time-saving game state, the probability / non-time-saving gaming state, and the big hit game state shifted from the probability / non-time-saving gaming state, it becomes a time-saving gaming state (variable probability 4R-2). The entry rate of the jackpot symbol "jackpot 6" of the first special symbol is set to 20/100.

The jackpot pattern "jackpot 7" of the first special pattern is a hit pattern 7, the number of rounds 8R (of which the number of actual rounds 7R) is given, and the rounds that make it easy to win a V prize are not set. After the jackpot game state shifted from the time-saving game state is ended, the time-saving game state is not entered and the non-time-saving game state is entered. However, after the end of the non-variable/time-saving game state, the probability/non-time-saving game state, and the jackpot game state shifted from the probability/non-time-saving game state, it becomes a time-saving game state (normal hit 8R). The entry rate of the jackpot symbol "jackpot 7" of the first special symbol is set to 40/100.

In the jackpot pattern "jackpot 6" of the second special pattern, the hit pattern is 8, the number of rounds is 12R (the number of actual rounds is 12R), and the round in which the V prize is easily won is set to the 4th round, and the jackpot game state is established. After the end, it becomes a time-saving game state (time-saving middle hit 12R-1). The entry rate of the jackpot pattern "jackpot 6" of the second special pattern is set to 9/100.

In the jackpot pattern "jackpot 7" of the second special pattern, the hit pattern is 9, the number of rounds is 12R (the number of actual rounds is 12R), and the round in which the V prize is easily won is set to the 4th round, and the jackpot game state is established. After the end, it becomes a time-saving game state (time-saving hit 12R-2). The entry rate of the jackpot symbol "jackpot 7" of the second special symbol is set to 3/100.

In the jackpot pattern "jackpot 8" of the second special pattern, the hit pattern is 10, the number of rounds is 8R (the number of rounds is actually 8R), and the round in which V winning is easy is set to the 4th round, and the jackpot game state is established. After the end, it becomes a time-saving game state (8R during time-saving). The entry rate of the jackpot pattern "jackpot 8" of the second special pattern is set to 45/100.

In the jackpot pattern "jackpot 9" of the second special pattern, the hit pattern is 11, the number of rounds is 4R (the number of rounds is actually 4R), and the round in which the V winning is easy is set to the 4th round, and the jackpot game state is established. After the end, it becomes a time-saving game state (hit 4R during time-saving). The entry rate of the jackpot symbol "jackpot 9" of the second special symbol is set to 43/100.

The large winning opening count number is set to count up to 8 for each of the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 as the maximum number of winnings per round. The time saving performance (specifications of the time saving game state) is set so that the time saving game state continues up to 100 times. The number of prize balls is 3 for each winning to the first starting opening 32, 3 for each winning to the second starting opening 33, and 4 or 3 for each winning to the general winning opening 40. , and it is set to be 14 per one winning to the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37).

The winning probability of normal symbols is set to be 1/65536 when the probability is low and 65534/65536 when the probability is high. Although not shown in FIG. 8, the number of winning symbols for normal symbols is set to 2 (distribution 1/2).

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the opening and closing patterns of the big winning slots in one round will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of opening/closing patterns A to D are defined as one-round opening/closing patterns (one-round opening/closing patterns) for the first big winning hole 36 and the second big winning hole 37 . In the present embodiment, both the first big prize opening 36 and the second big prize opening 37 may be simply referred to as "big prize opening". It should be noted that the opening/closing patterns A to D shown in FIG. 9 are merely examples, and the specific times and the like that define the opening/closing patterns may be other than those shown.

The opening/closing pattern A is an opening/closing pattern in which the open state of the first big winning hole 36 (big winning hole 1) continues for 27.996 seconds. The open/close pattern A is defined as a round section from the first open state to the final closed state. The round section is similarly defined as the period from the first open state to the final closed state in other opening/closing patterns. The section in which the open state is 27.996 seconds is a long open state in which the open state of the first big winning port 36 is relatively long. That is, in the opening/closing pattern A, the long opening of the first big winning hole 36 occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening/closing pattern A is 27.996 seconds.

The opening/closing pattern B is an opening/closing pattern in which the open state of the first big winning hole 36 (big winning hole 1) continues only for 0.102 seconds. In the section where the open state is 0.102 s, the open state of the first big winning port 36 is relatively short short open. In other words, in the opening/closing pattern B, the short opening of the first big winning hole 36 occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening/closing pattern B is 0.102 s.

The opening/closing pattern C is an opening/closing pattern in which the second big winning hole 37 (big winning hole 2) is first opened for 0.048 seconds, closed for 3 seconds, and then opened again for 27.948 seconds. . In the section where the open state is 0.048 s, the open state of the second large prize winning port 37 is relatively short short open, and in the section where the open state is 27.948 s, the open state of the second large prize winning port 37 is It becomes a relatively long long release. That is, in the opening/closing pattern C, after the short opening of the second big winning hole 37 occurs once, the closed state occurs once, and the long opening occurs once. The total opening time of the opening/closing pattern C is 27 .996s. In the open state of short opening, it is extremely difficult for game balls to enter the large winning opening, while in the open state of long opening, it is possible and easy for game balls to enter the big winning opening. ing. Such short-circuit opening is the same for the opening/closing pattern D, which will be described later.

The opening/closing pattern D is an opening/closing pattern in which the open state of the second big winning hole 37 (big winning hole 2) continues only for 0.048 seconds. In the section where the open state is 0.048 s, the open state of the second big winning port 37 is short open. That is, in the opening/closing pattern D, the short opening of the second big winning hole 37 occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening/closing pattern D is 0.048 s.

Thus, the substantial round game in the jackpot game state corresponds to the round game when the opening/closing control is performed based on the opening/closing pattern A or C described above. Then, the round game when the opening/closing control is performed based on the opening/closing pattern B or D becomes a non-real round game that does not correspond to the real round game.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific area 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

The displacement member 39 is basically designed to operate in conjunction with the opening/closing state of the second big prize winning opening 37 . As shown in FIG. 10, in principle, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member operation pattern) is such that after an initial operation period of 0.036 seconds in which the specific region 38A is in the open state, the specific region 38A is in the closed state. It is defined as an operation pattern in which there is a non-operation period of 4.012 s, and then the operation period continues again for a maximum of 29.144 s. The total actuation time of the displacement member actuation pattern is 29.180s. Since the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively short during the operation period of 0.036 s, it becomes extremely difficult to win a V prize in the specific area 38A. On the other hand, during the operation period, which is 29.144 seconds at the longest, the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively long, so V winning in the specific area 38A becomes relatively easy. However, regarding the operating period of up to 29.144 seconds, in one round in which the second large winning opening 37 is in the open/closed state, for example, the second large winning opening 37 is closed when the count number of the large winning opening reaches the upper limit winning number. state, and when a predetermined monitoring processing time regarding the residual ball described later has passed, the displacement member 39 is deactivated and the specific area 38A is closed even before the predetermined maximum length of 29.144 seconds elapses. can be.

In addition, in the present embodiment, control is performed to substantially facilitate or make it difficult to win a V prize by activating or deactivating the displacement member 39. It is possible to detect that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A regardless of the operation. That is, the period during which the V prize is valid is not set. However, the mode of control that makes it easier or harder to win a V prize is not limited to this. There may be. Specifically, when the transition member 39 is operating (in the case of the open state), the specific area switch 380A makes it possible to detect that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A, and the transition member 39 is operated. If not (closed state), the specific area switch 380A may make it impossible to detect that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 38A. That is, the period during which the V prize is valid may be set. In this case, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 38A during a period other than the period during which the V winning is valid, it is not possible to win the V winning and not shift to the variable probability game state.

[Big prize opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the big winning opening opening/closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big winning game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 11, a plurality of winning patterns 1 to 11 are defined as the large winning opening opening/closing patterns (winning patterns). Hit pattern 1 is a hit pattern corresponding to the probability variable time short hit 12R, and the number of rounds defined for the rounds that are generally open (hereinafter referred to as "the number of defined rounds") is 12R, and the number of rounds to the big winning opening This is a winning pattern in which the actual number of rounds in which winning is possible is defined as 12R. In addition, the interval between rounds is the interval in which the big prize gate is closed until the big prize gate is opened for the first time in the next round after the big prize gate is closed last in one round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, the patterns of the interval between rounds are the interval pattern a in which the closed state time (closed time) is 2034 ms, the interval pattern b in which it is 300 ms, and the interval pattern c in which it is 3000 ms. is stipulated. In the winning pattern 1, the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds is the interval pattern b, the interval between the 4th and 5th rounds is the interval pattern c, and the intervals between the other rounds are defined as the interval pattern a. there is In addition, the opening pattern C is set for the second large winning opening 37 at the 4th round, and the opening pattern A is set for the first large winning opening 36 at the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 12th rounds. In other words, in the winning pattern 1, the actual number of rounds is 12 rounds from the 1st to the 12th rounds, and only the 4th round is executed as a round in which V winning to the specific area 38A is easy.

The hit patterns 2 and 3 are hit patterns corresponding to the probability variable short time per 8R-1 and the probability variable short time per 8R-2, and the prescribed number of rounds is 8R and the actual number of rounds is 4R. In the winning patterns 2 and 3, the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds is the interval pattern b, the interval between the 4th and 5th rounds is the interval pattern c, and the interval between the other rounds is defined as the interval pattern a. It is Further, it is defined that the opening/closing pattern C is applied to the second large winning opening 37 at the 4th round, and the opening/closing pattern A is applied to the first large winning opening 36 at the 1st to 3rd rounds. In other words, in the winning patterns 2 and 3, the actual number of rounds is 4 rounds from the 1st round to the 4th round, and only the 4th round is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The winning pattern 4 is a winning pattern corresponding to the probability variable short-time winning 4R, and is a winning pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 4R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 4R. In the winning pattern 4, the intervals between the 3rd and 4th rounds are defined as the interval pattern b, and the other intervals between the rounds are defined as the interval pattern a. Further, it is defined that the opening/closing pattern C is applied to the second large winning opening 37 at the 4th round, and the opening/closing pattern A is applied to the first large winning opening 36 at the 1st to 3rd rounds. That is, in the winning pattern 4, the actual number of rounds is 4 rounds, ie, the 1st to 4th rounds, and only the 4th round is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The winning patterns 5 and 6 are winning patterns corresponding to the variable probability 4R-1 and the variable probability 4R-2. In the winning pattern 4, the intervals between the 3rd and 4th rounds are defined as the interval pattern b, and the other intervals between the rounds are defined as the interval pattern a. Further, it is defined that the opening/closing pattern C is applied to the second large winning opening 37 at the 4th round, and the opening/closing pattern A is applied to the first large winning opening 36 at the 1st to 3rd rounds. That is, in the winning pattern 4, the actual number of rounds is 4 rounds, ie, the 1st to 4th rounds, and only the 4th round is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The winning pattern 7 is a winning pattern corresponding to a normal winning of 8R, and is a winning pattern in which the prescribed number of rounds is 8R and the actual number of rounds is 7R. In the winning pattern 7, the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds is the interval pattern b, the interval between the 4th and 5th rounds is the interval pattern c, and the intervals between the other rounds are defined as the interval pattern a. there is Further, it is defined that the opening/closing pattern A is used for the first big winning opening 36 in the 1st to 3rd R and 5th to 8th R. As shown in FIG. In other words, in the winning pattern 7, the actual number of rounds is 7 rounds of 1st to 3rd and 5th to 8th rounds, and the rounds in which V winning to the specific area 38A is easy are not executed.

The winning patterns 8 and 9 are winning patterns corresponding to 12R-1 and 12R-2 during time saving, and are winning patterns in which the prescribed number of rounds is 12R and the actual number of rounds is 12R. In winning patterns 8 and 9, the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds is defined as interval pattern b, the interval between the 4th and 5th rounds is defined as interval pattern c, and the interval between other rounds is defined as interval pattern a. It is In addition, it is defined that the opening/closing pattern C is applied to the second large prize winning opening 37 in the 4th round, and the opening/closing pattern A is applied to the first large winning opening 36 in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th to 12th rounds. That is, in the winning patterns 8 and 9, the actual number of rounds is 12 rounds from the 1st to the 12th rounds, and only the 4th round is executed as a round in which V winning to the specific area 38A is easy.

The winning pattern 10 is a winning pattern corresponding to 8R winning during time saving, and is a winning pattern in which the prescribed number of rounds is 8R and the actual number of rounds is 8R among them. In the winning pattern 10, the interval between the 3rd and 4th rounds is the interval pattern b, the interval between the 4th and 5th rounds is the interval pattern c, and the intervals between the other rounds are defined as the interval pattern a. there is In addition, it is defined that the opening/closing pattern C is applied to the second large winning opening 37 in the 4th R, and the opening/closing pattern A is applied to the first large winning opening 36 in the 1st to 3rd R and the 5th to 8th R. That is, in the winning pattern 10, the actual number of rounds is 8 rounds from the 1st round to the 8th round, and only the 4th round is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

The winning pattern 11 is a winning pattern corresponding to 4R winning during time saving, and is a winning pattern in which the specified number of rounds is 4R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 4R. In the winning pattern 11, the intervals between the 3rd and 4th rounds are defined as the interval pattern b, and the other intervals between the rounds are defined as the interval pattern a. Further, it is defined that the opening/closing pattern C is applied to the second large winning opening 37 at the 4th round, and the opening/closing pattern A is applied to the first large winning opening 36 at the 1st to 3rd rounds. That is, in the winning pattern 11, the actual number of rounds is 4 rounds, ie, the 1st to 4th rounds, and only the 4th round is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

In addition, in the winning patterns 1 to 6 and 8 to 11, only the 4th R round (specific second round game) in which V winning to the specific area 38A is easy is executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, a specific second round game may be executed in other rounds (1st to 3rd R and 5th to 12th R). Also, in these winning patterns, the specific second round game may be executed multiple times. Also, in each winning pattern described above, including these winning patterns, the second big winning hole 37 is in an open state, but a round (usually the second round game) in which it is difficult to win a V prize in the specific area 38A is executed. may be Further, in FIG. 11, as the interval between rounds, the portion where the interval pattern a is defined may be defined as the interval pattern b or c, and the portion where the interval pattern b is defined may be defined as the interval pattern a or c. Alternatively, the location where interval pattern c is defined may be defined as interval pattern a or b. That is, various modifications can be made according to the effect mode in the effect mode of the jackpot game state.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled by the winning patterns 1, 8 and 9, since the actual number of rounds is 12 rounds, the number of game media that the player can acquire (expected acquisition When the number of game media is the largest and the jackpot game state is controlled by the winning pattern 10, since the actual number of rounds is 8 rounds, the expected number of game media to be acquired is the second largest, and the jackpot game is played by the winning pattern 7. When the state is controlled, the actual number of rounds is 7 rounds, so the expected number of game media to be acquired is the third largest, and when the jackpot game state is controlled by other winning patterns, the actual number of rounds is 4. Since it is a round, the expected number of game media to be acquired is the smallest.

However, the manner in which the expected number of game media to be acquired is varied is not limited to this. For example, by making the number of prize balls when the game balls enter the first big prize hole 36 and the number of prize balls when the game balls enter the second big prize hole 37 different, The number of media may be varied. Specifically, the number of prize balls when a game ball enters the first big prize hole 36 is 8, and the number of prize balls when a game ball enters the second big prize hole 37 is 4. do. When the second round game can be executed a plurality of times as described above, in the winning pattern 9, the number of times the second round game is executed is made larger than in the winning pattern 8.例文帳に追加Further, for example, by making the upper limit winning number of the first big winning hole 36 and the upper limit winning number of the second big winning hole 37 different, the expected number of game media to be acquired may be changed. Specifically, the maximum winning number of the first big winning opening 36 is set to 8, and the maximum winning number of the second big winning opening 37 is set to 4. When the second round game can be executed a plurality of times as described above, in the winning pattern 9, the number of times the second round game is executed is made larger than in the winning pattern 8.例文帳に追加Even in this way, it is possible to vary the expected number of game media to be acquired.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 18 and 21. FIG. The table defines lottery value (random value) information for determining a predetermined item based on a lottery value (random value) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range. Value information is synonymous with so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, "random value" may be simply referred to as "random number".

<Main fluctuation pattern determination table>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a main fluctuation pattern determination table. The main variation pattern determination table is used by the main CPU 61 to determine the mode of variation display and stop display of special symbols (variation pattern), and the time (variation time) from when the special symbols are variably displayed to when they are stopped. It is a table that is used, and the game state (non-probability / non-time-saving gaming state corresponding to normal mode, probability / non-time-saving gaming state corresponding to special mode, or probability / non-probability / time-saving gaming state corresponding to RUSH mode or non-probability / time-saving game state), the result of jackpot judgment (win or lose), the range of random numbers for reach judgment (0 to 250), and the range of random numbers for effect selection (0 to 99). is stipulated, and if the game state is a probability variable / time-saving gaming state or a non-variable / time-saving gaming state corresponding to the RUSH mode, whether the number of games is "1 to 87 times" (RUSH mode battle Different variation pattern types are defined depending on whether it is a production section) or whether it is "88 to 99" or "100 times" (whether it is a transformation production section of RUSH mode).

The main CPU 61 determines the variation contents of the special symbols displayed in the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54 by determining the variation pattern and the variation time using the main variation pattern determination table. At the same time, by transmitting to the sub CPU 71 a variation pattern specification command that enables recognition of the variation content of the special symbol, the sub CPU 71 can perform variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol linked to the variation content of the special symbol. It has become. Note that the main variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 is an example, and the determined variation pattern, variation time, and other factors are not limited to this. For example, the fluctuation pattern is further subdivided into a prefetch pending change pattern (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the fluctuation pending change pattern (see FIGS. 15 and 16), or a pseudo-continuation (during the fluctuation of a special symbol, a decorative symbol It is also possible to determine the number of times (pseudo number of runs) to be executed, as if by performing the temporary stop and re-variation only, as if a plurality of symbol variations were performed in a pseudo manner. That is, when the main CPU 61 determines the variation pattern, it is also possible to determine these elements.

The range of random numbers for reach determination defines the range of random numbers for reach determination that determines whether to execute reach or not to execute reach. The reach determination random number is extracted from a reach determination counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first start port 32 or the second start port 33 in each game state. Also, the effect selection random number range defines the range of the effect selection random numbers that determine the variation pattern, the variation time, and the content of the effect with respect to the ready-to-win determination random number range. The effect selection random number is extracted from the effect selection counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when the game ball wins the first start port 32 or the second start port 33 in each game state.

In the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, for example, in the normal mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined to execute reach, the selection rate is 20/100, as a variation pattern "08H" is selected. The variation pattern “08H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 120000 ms (120 s) and the content of the effect is “successful operation-linked effect→super reach C failure”. When "08H" is selected as the variation pattern, an operation-linked effect, which will be described later, is executed, and after the operation-linked effect is executed, the effect develops (successful operation-linked effect), and is compared with other ready-to-win effects. A super ready-to-win C performance with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is executed, and finally the decorative pattern does not take a specific display mode, indicating that the result of the judgment of the big win is a loss.

In addition, in the normal mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is decided not to execute the ready-to-win game, "04H" is selected as the variation pattern with a selection rate of 10/100. The variation pattern “04H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 30000 ms (30 s) and the effect content is “operation-linked effect failure”. When "04H" is selected as the variation pattern, an operation-linked effect, which will be described later, is executed, but the effect does not develop after the operation-linked effect is executed (operation-linked effect fails), and finally the decorative pattern is specified. , and the result of the big hit determination is shown to be a loss.

In addition, in the normal mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, "12H" is selected as the variation pattern with a selection rate of 30/100. The variation pattern “12H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 121000 ms (121 s) and the content of the effect is “successful operation-linked effect→super reach C hit”. When "12H" is selected as the variation pattern, an operation-linked effect, which will be described later, is executed, and after the operation-linked effect is executed, the effect develops (successful operation-linked effect), and is compared with other ready-to-win effects. A super ready-to-win C performance with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is executed, and finally the decorative pattern becomes a specific display mode, indicating that the result of the judgment of the big win is a hit.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12, in the special mode, the variation pattern is determined in the same manner as in the normal mode, and descriptions of the determined variation pattern, variation time, and effect content are omitted. . However, it is not limited to this, and in the special mode, the variation patterns described above may be determined with different selection probabilities, or one or a plurality of variation patterns unique to the special mode may be set.

Also, in the 1st to 87th rounds of the RUSH mode, if the result of the big hit judgment is a loss and it is decided to execute the reach, the selection rate is 50/100, and "14H" is selected as the variation pattern. be done. The variation pattern “14H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 100000 ms (100 s) and the content of the effect is “race battle reach loss”. When "14H" is selected as the variation pattern, an effect is executed in which the hero character battles with the main character in a race against the opponent character determined by lottery or in the order in which scenarios are determined in the RUSH mode, which will be described later. As a result, it is shown that the main character is defeated and the result of the big hit determination is a loss.

Also, in the 1st to 87th times of the RUSH mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, "17H" is selected as the variation pattern with a selection rate of 50/100. The variation pattern “17H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 101000 ms (101 s) and the effect content is “race race battle reach”. When "17H" is selected as the variation pattern, an effect is executed in which the hero character battles with the main character in a race against the opponent characters determined by lottery or in the order in which scenarios are determined in the RUSH mode, which will be described later. As a result, it is shown that the main character wins and the result of the big hit determination is a hit.

Also, in the 1st to 87th times of the RUSH mode, when the result of the big hit determination is a hit, the selection rate is 10/100, and "18H" is selected as the variation pattern. The variation pattern “18H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 81000 ms (81 s) and the effect content is “special character battle reach win”. When "18H" is selected as the variation pattern, character 1 is selected as the opponent character regardless of the order in which scenarios are determined in the RUSH mode, which will be described later, and an effect in which character 1 and the main character battle in a race is executed. In addition, as a result of the race, the main character wins and the result of the big hit determination is a hit. It should be noted that the performance contents of the battle presentation to be executed may be made different between the "running race battle win" and the "special character battle win win". In addition, this variation pattern "18H" is selected only when the result of the jackpot determination is a specific jackpot with the greatest profit (for example, a short-time medium hit 12R-1 or 12R-2). may That is, the effect of "special character battle ready win" may be a effect in which a specific jackpot with the largest amount of profit is determined.

Also, in the 88th to 99th rounds of the RUSH mode, if the result of the big hit judgment is a loss and it is decided to execute a reach, with a selection rate of 50/100, "19H" is selected as the variation pattern. be done. The variation pattern “19H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 10000 ms (10 s) and the effect content is “normal reach (transformation failure) failure”. When "19H" is selected as the variation pattern, whether or not the fighting character according to the number of games in RUSH mode (for example, character 1 in the 88th game, character 12 in the 99th game) transforms (display (whether or not the mode changes) is executed, and finally the transformation does not occur (the display mode does not change) (transformation failure), indicating that the result of the big hit determination is a loss. It's like

Also, in the 88th to 99th times of the RUSH mode, if the result of the big hit determination is a hit, the selection rate is 50/100, and "21H" is selected as the variation pattern. The variation pattern “21H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 11000 ms (11 s) and the effect content is “per normal reach (successful transformation)”. When "21H" is selected as the variation pattern, whether or not the fighting character according to the number of games in RUSH mode (for example, character 1 in the 88th game, character 12 in the 99th game) transforms (display (whether the mode changes or not) is executed, and finally transforms (the display mode changes) (successful transformation) to indicate that the result of the big hit determination is a hit. It's becoming

In addition, in the 88th to 99th times of the RUSH mode, a variation pattern in which transformation effects are always performed may be selected. That is, when the result of the judgment of the big hit is a loss, an effect is executed in which the opponent character fails to transform according to the number of games in the RUSH mode, and when the result of the judgment of the big win is a win, the game in the RUSH mode. It is also possible to execute an effect in which the opponent character according to the number succeeds in transformation. By configuring in this way, even if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the production in which all the competing characters appear is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the performance using a plurality of characters.

Also, in the 100th RUSH mode, if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, "23H" is selected as the variation pattern with a selection rate of 100/100. The variation pattern “23H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 15000 ms (15 s) and the effect is “transformation failure (failure)→ball display”. When "23H" is selected as the variation pattern, a transformation effect is executed to indicate whether or not the main character will transform (whether or not the display mode will change). The mode is not changed), but (transformation failure), the result of the big hit determination is shown to be a loss. Also, when the transformation fails, the number of game balls acquired during the RUSH mode is displayed.

Also, in the 100th RUSH mode, if the result of the big hit determination is a hit, "24H" is selected as the variation pattern with a selection rate of 100/100. The variation pattern “24H” is a variation pattern in which the variation time is 20000 ms (20 s) and the effect content is “successful transformation (hit)”. When "24H" is selected as the variation pattern, a transformation effect indicating whether or not the main character will transform (whether or not the display mode will change) is executed, and finally transforms (whether or not the display mode changes). changes) (successful transformation) to indicate that the result of the big hit determination is a hit.

<Prefetch pending change pattern determination table>
13 and 14 are diagrams showing an example of a prefetch pending change pattern determination table. The prefetching pending change pattern determination table is a table referred to in the pending display mode change effect processing (see FIG. 53 described later) under the control of the sub CPU 71, and the result of the big hit determination (hit or lose), the first special symbol game or the first 2 The type of prefetch pending change pattern (prefetch pending change effect content) determined according to various parameters such as the number of pending special symbol games (number of pending), variation pattern, and random number range for sub effect selection stipulated. Specific control of the look-ahead suspension change effect using the table will be described later.

In this embodiment, in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, a first reserved ball display area 701 for displaying each of the start memories (held balls) of the first special symbols in a predetermined display mode, and the start of the second special symbol. Among the held balls displayed in the second held ball display area 702 and the first held ball display area 701 or the second held ball display area 702, There is provided a variable reserved ball display area 703 that displays the reserved balls digested in the current game (the relevant fluctuation) in a predetermined display mode (see FIG. 61 described later). The display of the held ball is to be performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the starting port (the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33), whether or not the hit, the type of hit, and the contents of the effect are determined in advance. It's becoming

The look-ahead pending change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 uses the display mode of the held ball displayed in the first held ball display area 701 and the second held ball display area 702 before digesting it as the change. It is used to determine whether or not to change, and it is possible to notify the degree of expectation for a big hit by changing the display mode of the held ball by executing a so-called "prediction effect".

In addition, in this embodiment, as an example of the display mode of the held ball, the display mode (white), the display mode (blue), the display mode (yellow), the display mode (green), the display mode (red), and the display mode ( rainbow) is provided, and the display mode (white) is the normal display mode. The degree of expectation of a big hit (that is, the possibility that the result of the judgment of a big hit is a hit) is the lowest in the display mode (white), the display mode (blue), the display mode (yellow), the display mode (green), the display mode (red) ), it becomes higher. Also, the display mode (rainbow) is such that a big hit is decided. However, the display mode (rainbow) may appear even when the big win expectation is extremely high, but the big win is not confirmed, and the result of the big win determination is a loss.

In the look-ahead pending change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13, for example, in the normal mode, the result of the big hit determination is a loss, and the number of starting memories (holding number) of the first special symbol is "1", and as a variation pattern When "05H" is determined, "prefetching pending change pattern 104" is selected as the prefetching pending change pattern with a selection rate of 11/100. When the "forecast pending change pattern 104" is selected, when the game ball passes through the first start port 32, the display mode (blue) is displayed as indicating the pending ball used in the next variation. A ball is displayed in the first reserved ball display area 701, and an effect of changing the reserved ball to a display mode (yellow) is performed when the change indicated by the reserved ball starts.

It should be noted that the "forecast pending change pattern 104" is, for example, when the game ball passes through the first start port 32, the display mode that is the normal display mode ( White) retained ball is displayed in the first retained ball display area 701, the retained ball is changed to the display mode (blue) before the variation indicated by the retained ball starts, and the variation indicated by the retained ball starts. At times, an effect of changing the reserved ball to the display mode (yellow) may be performed. That is, if the selected look-ahead hold change pattern changes the display mode of the hold ball from the beginning, hold at any timing from when the game ball passes through the start opening to before the change starts It may be one that changes the display mode of the sphere. Other look-ahead pending change patterns are similar.

Also, in the normal mode, if the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the start memory number (holding number) of the first special symbol is "4", and "05H" is determined as the variation pattern, 1 With a selection rate of /100, "prefetch pending change pattern 405" is selected as the prefetch pending change pattern. When the "prefetching pending change pattern 405" is selected, when the game ball passes through the first starting port 32, it is displayed in a normal display mode as indicating the pending ball used in the variation after four times. A held ball in a certain display mode (white) is displayed in the first held ball display area 701, and when the next variation starts, the held ball is changed to the display mode (blue), and when the next variation starts Change the retained ball to the display mode (yellow), change the retained ball to the display mode (green) when the next variation starts, and display the retained ball when the variation indicated by the retained ball starts An effect of changing to the mode (red) is performed.

In the look-ahead suspension change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14, for example, in the normal mode, the result of the big hit determination is a hit, the number of starting memories (number of suspensions) of the first special symbol is "1", and the variation pattern When "09H" is determined, "prefetching pending change pattern 111" is selected as the prefetching pending change pattern at a selection rate of 1/100. When the "forecasting hold change pattern 111" is selected, when the game ball passes through the first start port 32, the display mode (blue) hold A ball is displayed in the first reserved ball display area 701, and an effect of changing the reserved ball to a display mode (rainbow) is performed when the change indicated by the reserved ball starts. In this way, in the prefetch pending change pattern of the present embodiment, not only the above-described prefetch pending change pattern in which the display mode changes sequentially in the order of the degree of expectation for the big hit, but also the degree of expectation for the big hit changes in a plurality of stages with one change. It includes a look-ahead pending change pattern that changes the display mode so that it does.

Also, in the normal mode, if the result of the big hit determination is a hit, the start memory number (holding number) of the first special symbol is "4", and "09H" is determined as the variation pattern, 1 With a selection rate of /100, "prefetch pending change pattern 416" is selected as the prefetch pending change pattern. When the "forecasting hold change pattern 416" is selected, when the game ball passes through the first start port 32, it is displayed in a normal display mode as indicating the hold ball used in the variation after four times. A held ball in a certain display mode (blue) is displayed in the first held ball display area 701, and when the next variation starts, the held ball is changed to the display mode (yellow), and when the next variation starts Change the held ball to the display mode (green), change the held ball to the display mode (red) when the next variation starts, and display the held ball when the variation indicated by the held ball starts An effect of changing to a mode (rainbow) is performed.

<Relevant change pending change pattern determination table>
15 and 16 are diagrams showing an example of the change pending change pattern determination table. The variation pending change pattern determination table is a table referred to in the pending display mode change effect processing (see FIG. 53 described later) under the control of the sub CPU 71, and the result of the big hit determination (win or lose) is the pseudo-continuous change performed in the variation. The type of the variable hold change pattern (the content of the change hold change effect) that is determined according to various parameters such as the number of times (pseudo run number), the change pattern, and the random number range for sub effect selection is defined. . Concrete control of the variable hold change effect using the table will be described later.

The variation pending change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 determines whether or not to change the display mode of the pending ball displayed in the variable pending ball display area 703 when digested as the variation. It is used for this purpose, and it is possible to notify the degree of expectation of a big hit by changing the display mode of the held ball.

In the variation pending variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15, for example, in the normal mode, the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the number of pseudo-runs performed in the variation (pseudo-run number) is "1", and the variation When "05H" is determined as the pattern and the display mode of the current held ball is the display mode (blue), with a selection rate of 30/100, the Variation Hold Change Pattern 205” is selected. When the "variation pending change pattern 205" is selected, the pending ball in the display mode (blue) is displayed in the variable pending ball display area 703 as an indication of the pending ball used in the variation. At the time of execution of the first pseudo-run (pseudo-run 1), an effect of changing the display mode (yellow) of the held ball is performed.

It should be noted that the "forecast pending change pattern 205" indicates, for example, the held ball used in the variation, and the held ball in the display mode (white), which is the normal display mode, before the start of the variation. When displayed in the ball display area 703, the held ball is changed to the display mode (blue) at the start of the change, and the held ball is displayed at the time of the first pseudo-run (pseudo-run 1). An effect of changing to the mode (yellow) may be performed. That is, the change pending change pattern may be a hold change pattern that performs an effect of changing the display mode of the hold ball between before the start of the change and at the start of the change. The same applies to the other relevant fluctuation pending change patterns.

For example, in FIG. 15, when the display mode of the ball on hold before the start of the change is the display mode (white) as the variation pending change pattern when the pseudo run number not shown is "0" , when the variation pending change pattern that changes the display mode of the held ball at the start of the variation to the display mode (blue), or when the display mode of the held ball before the start of the variation is the display mode (blue), It is possible to set a variation pending change pattern or the like that changes the display mode of the held ball at the start of the variation to the display mode (green).

Also, in the normal mode, the result of the big hit determination is a loss, the number of pseudo-runs (pseudo-runs) performed in the variation is "4", and "05H" is determined as the variation pattern. When the display mode of the current ball on hold is the display mode (white), the "variation pending change pattern 505" is selected as the variable pending change pattern at a selection rate of 10/100. When the "variation pending change pattern 505" is selected, the pending ball in the display mode (white) is displayed in the variable pending ball display area 703 as indicating the pending ball used in the relevant fluctuation. Then, when the first pseudo-run is executed (pseudo-run 1), the held ball is changed to the display mode (blue), and when the second pseudo-run is executed (pseudo-run 2), the held ball is displayed in the display mode ( yellow), and when the third pseudo-run is executed (pseudo-run 3), the held ball is changed to the display mode (green), and when the fourth pseudo-run is executed (pseudo-run 4), the held ball is changed. is changed to a display mode (red).

In the variation pending variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16, for example, in the normal mode, the result of the jackpot determination is a win, the number of pseudo-runs performed in the variation (pseudo-run number) is "1", and the variation When "09H" is determined as the pattern and the display mode of the current ball on hold is the display mode (green), with a selection rate of 30/100, Variation hold change pattern 212” is selected. When the "variation pending change pattern 212" is selected, the pending ball in the display mode (green) is displayed in the variable pending ball display area 703 as indicating the pending ball used in the relevant fluctuation. At the time of execution of the first pseudo-run (pseudo-run 1), an effect of changing the display mode (rainbow) of the held ball is performed. In this way, the variable pending change pattern of the present embodiment includes not only the variable pending change pattern in which the display mode changes sequentially in the order of the big hit expectation, but also the big hit expectation changes in multiple stages with one change. It includes the variable holding change pattern that changes the display mode so as to change the display mode.

Also, in the normal mode, the result of the jackpot determination is a hit, the number of pseudo-runs (pseudo-runs) performed in the variation is "4", and "09H" is determined as the variation pattern. When the display mode of the current ball on hold is the display mode (white), the "variable pending change pattern 510" is selected as the variable pending change pattern at a selection rate of 10/100. When the "variation pending change pattern 510" is selected, the pending ball in the display mode (blue) is displayed in the variable pending ball display area 703 as indicating the pending ball used in the relevant variation. Then, when the first pseudo-run is executed (pseudo-run 1), the held ball is changed to the display mode (yellow), and when the second pseudo-run is executed (pseudo-run 2), the held ball is displayed in the display mode ( Green), when the third pseudo-run is executed (pseudo-run 3), the held ball is changed to the display mode (red), and when the fourth pseudo-run is executed (pseudo-run 4), the held ball is changed to a display mode (rainbow).

<Operation-linked effect scenario determination table>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of an operation-linked effect scenario determination table. The operation-linked effect scenario determination table is a table referred to in the normal mode process (see FIG. 52 described later) under the control of the sub CPU 71, and contains the result of the big hit determination (hit-or-lose), the variation pattern, and the random number range for selecting the sub effect. Information (operation-linked presentation scenario) for managing the content of the determined operation-linked presentation is defined according to various parameters such as. 17, 18, and 21, lottery value information is defined when the random number range (probability denominator) is 32768. For example, when the lottery value is 32768, the lottery rate is 32768/32768. , that is, 100%.

In the operation-linked production scenario determination table shown in FIG. Scenario 6 (failure) to Scenario 10 (failure) with no possibility of success (failure) are defined, and if "08H" or "12H" is determined as the variation pattern, One of scenarios 1 (success) to scenario 5 (success) is determined by lottery, and if "04H" is determined as the variation pattern, any of scenarios 6 (failure) to scenario 10 (failure) The scenario is determined by lottery. The contents of each scenario will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18-20.

As shown in FIG. 17, when "08H" or "12H" is determined as the variation pattern, scenario 1 (success) is determined with a lottery rate of 7768/32768, and scenario 2 (success) with a lottery rate of 7000/32768. Success) is determined, and one of scenarios 3 (success) to scenario 5 (success) is determined at a lottery rate of 6000/32768. The lottery rate may be different between when "08H" is determined as the variation pattern and when "12H" is determined as the variation pattern. For example, when "12H" is determined as the variation pattern (that is, the result of the big hit determination is a hit) than when "08H" is determined as the variation pattern (that is, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss) case) may define the lottery rate so that a specific scenario (for example, scenario 2 (success)) is determined with a high probability.

Further, as shown in FIG. 17, when "04H" is determined as the variation pattern, scenario 6 (failure) is determined with a lottery rate of 7768/32768, and scenario 7 (failure) with a lottery rate of 7000/32768. is determined, and one of scenarios 8 (failure) to scenario 10 (failure) is determined with a lottery rate of 6000/32768.

<Operation-linked effect stage transition decision table>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of an operation-linked effect stage transition determination table. The operation-linked effect stage transition determination table is a table that is referred to in the depression operation button operation determination process (see FIGS. 45 and 46 described later) under the control of the sub CPU 71, and indicates the current stage, type of operation-linked effect scenario, and Information (presence or absence of step transition) for determining whether or not to transition the stage of the effect in the operation-linked effect is defined according to various parameters such as the sub effect selection random number range. Specific control of the operation-linked effect using the table will be described later.

In the operation-linked production stage transition determination table shown in FIG. 18, the stage transitions from the current stage to the next stage when the depression operation button 9A is operated for each operation-linked production scenario that has been determined (see FIG. 17). A lottery value for determining whether to move (step transition "yes") and whether to not move from the current stage to the next stage (step transition "no") when the push operation button 9A is operated are determined. A lottery value is defined, and whether or not to shift the stage is determined depending on which range the sub effect selection random number range belongs to.

For example, if "scenario 1 (success)" is determined as the operation-linked effect scenario and the current stage is "0" or "1" when the push operation button 9A is operated, A lottery rate of 24576/32768 determines that the stage transition is "present", and a lottery rate of 8192/32768 determines that the stage transition is "absent". Also, if the current stage is one of "2" to "5", the lottery rate of 16384/32768 determines the stage transition "yes", and the lottery rate of 16384/32768 determines the stage transition "no" be done. Also, if the current stage is "6", the lottery rate of 14107/32768 determines stage transition "yes", and the lottery rate of 18661/32768 determines stage transition "no". Also, if the current stage is one of "8" to "11", the lottery rate of 10922/32768 determines the stage transition "yes", and the lottery rate of 21846/32768 determines the stage transition "no". be done. When the current stage is "7", it is not determined by lottery whether or not to shift the stage. A decision is made to transition the stage. However, in the operation-linked effect stage transition determination table shown in FIG. 18, when the depression operation button 9A is operated after the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the stage transition "Yes" is determined at a lottery rate of 32768/32768. If the push operation button 9A is operated before the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the stage transition "no" is determined at a lottery rate of 32768/32768, It may be configured so that the stage transition “yes” is not determined.

Here, stage "7" in "scenario 1 (success)" is set as a conditional stage transition period. The conditional stage transition period is provided so that when the depression operation button 9A is operated after a predetermined transition condition has been established among the stages in the operation-linked production scenario, the stage will always transition to the next stage. In this embodiment, the predetermined transition condition is that the conditional stage transition period has passed. That is, in the present embodiment, for example, when transitioning to stage "7" in "scenario 1 (success)", a conditional stage transition period (for example, 1.5 Seconds (1500 ms)), even if the push operation button 9A is operated, it is not decided to shift the stage, but after the conditional stage transition period elapses, the push operation button 9A is operated. In such a case, it is always decided to shift the stage. Also, if the push button 9A is not operated even after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed, it is not decided to shift the stage. Stages "7" and "11" in "Scenario 2 (success)", "Scenario 4 (success)", "Scenario 5 (success)", "Scenario 9 (failure)", and "Scenario 10 (failure)" Stage "7" in stage "8", "scenario 6 (failure)", and "scenario 7 (failure)" is also set as a conditional stage transition period. On the other hand, in "scenario 3 (success)" and "scenario 8 (failure)", the conditional stage transition period is not set, and in all stages, when the push operation button 9A is operated, the stage is transitioned. Whether or not to allow it is determined by a lottery. Thus, in this embodiment, in the operation-linked effect, by providing the effect stage set as the conditional stage transition period, the predetermined period (conditional stage transition period) in the process of effect stage transition is Since it is possible to create a state in which the stage is not shifted without fail, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the player, who was able to smoothly shift the stage to the stage of performance, and to diversify the stage of performance. .

Note that the predetermined transition condition is not limited to the one described above. For example, as the predetermined transition condition, it is possible to adopt that the push operation button 9A is operated more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the conditional stage transition period. In this case, when the push button 9A is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or more and then the push button 9A is further operated, the next step may be immediately performed, or a conditional step may be performed. You may make it transfer to the next stage after progress of a transition period. Further, as a predetermined transition condition, a specific period within the conditional stage transition period (e.g., after X seconds (e.g., 0.5 seconds) have elapsed from the start of the conditional stage transition period, Y seconds (e.g., 1 It is also possible to adopt that the push-down operation button 9A is operated during the second (period before elapse). In this case, when the push-down button 9A is operated after the push-down operation button 9A is operated in the specific period, the next step may be immediately performed, or the next step may be performed after the conditional step transition period has passed. You may make it shift to the stage of. By doing so, it is possible to intentionally increase the number of operations of the depression operation button 9A or change the operation timing in the operation-linked effect, thereby making it possible to diversify the effect.

Also, the conditional stage transition period is not limited to the above-described one, and can be set as appropriate as long as it is within a predetermined time (operation-linked effect effective time) as an executable time of the operation-linked effect. For example, when setting stage "7" as the conditional stage transition period, set 1.5 seconds (1500 ms) as the conditional stage transition period so that an image of 90 frames can be displayed. When "8" is set as the conditional stage transition period, set 2 seconds (2000 ms) capable of displaying 120 frames of images as the conditional stage transition period, and set stage "11" as the condition In the case of setting as the stepped transition period with condition, the conditional stepped transition period may be set to 4 seconds (4000 ms) that allows the image of 240 frames to be displayed. That is, the later the stage set as the conditional stage transition period, the longer the conditional stage transition period. Alternatively, the later the stage set as the conditional stage transition period, the shorter the conditional stage transition period. The same applies to the specific period described above. By doing so, the timing of transitioning from the conditional stage transition period to the next stage can be varied depending on which stage is set as the conditional stage transition period, so that the effects can be diversified. It becomes possible.

Also, the lottery rate for determining whether to shift the stage is not limited to the one described above. For example, an operation-linked effect scenario may be defined in which the lottery rate at which stage transition “yes” is determined in a stage other than the conditional stage transition period is 32768/32768. Specifically, in “Scenario 1 (Success)”, stage “7” is specified as a conditional stage transition period, and stage transition “Yes” in stages “1” to “6” and “8” to “11” is determined as 32768/32768. By doing so, the stage other than the conditional stage transition period is immediately shifted to the next stage, and in the conditional stage transition period, the transition to the next stage is not performed unless a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to perform a more sharp production.

In this case, a similar lottery rate may also be defined for "scenario 6 (failure)" paired with "scenario 1 (success)". However, in this case, since "scenario 6 (failure)" ultimately results in failure of the operation-linked effect, the predetermined period as the conditional stage transition period is the same as that in "scenario 1 (success)". (e.g., if the conditional stage transition period in "Scenario 1 (Success)" is 1.5 seconds, the conditional stage transition period in "Scenario 6 (Failure)" is 9 seconds), or Even if the push operation button 9A is operated after a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the conditional stage transition period, the next stage is not transitioned (for example, the lottery rate at which the stage transition "yes" is determined is set. 0/32768), or the probability of moving to the next stage may be lowered (for example, the lottery rate at which stage transition “yes” is determined to be 8192/32768). In other words, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the conditional stage transition period in "scenario 6 (success)" than when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the conditional stage transition period in "scenario 1 (success)", You may make it difficult to shift to the next stage. By doing so, for example, when a conditional stage transition period occurs in stage "7", "scenario 1 (success)" or "scenario 6 (failure)" is determined as the operation-linked production scenario. If the next stage is reached after the predetermined transition condition is established, the possibility that “Scenario 1 (success)” has been determined increases, and at the same time, the expectation of a big win is high. will be able to recognize That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit can be changed depending on whether or not the conditional stage transition period is shifted to the next stage. This makes it possible to improve the interest in the game.

<Example of production content of operation-linked production>
Here, an example of the effect content of the operation-linked effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are diagrams showing an example of the effect content for each operation-linked effect scenario. In the following description, a case where "scenario 1 (success)" is determined as an operation-linked effect scenario will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 19, when the current stage is "0", the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "yes" is determined at the lottery rate of 24576/32768, the display area 4A , the character 1 is displayed and the next stage is entered. On the other hand, when the depressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage transition "no" is determined at the lottery rate of 8192/32768, the character 1 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the next stage is not shifted. In this case, the current level remains "0" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the level transition "present" is determined. The current stage remains "0" even when the push button 9A is not operated.

Further, when the current stage is "1", the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "yes" is determined at the lottery rate of 24576/32768, in addition to the character 1 in the display area 4A to display character 2 and move to the next stage. On the other hand, when the push operation button 9A is operated, but the stage transition "no" is determined at the lottery rate of 8192/32768, the character 2 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the next stage is not shifted. In this case, the current level remains "1" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the level transition "yes" is determined. Also, the current stage remains at "1" even when the push button 9A is not operated.

Further, when the current level is "2", the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the level transition "yes" is determined at the lottery rate of 16384/32768, characters 1 and 2 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to , the character 3 is displayed, and the next stage is entered. On the other hand, when the depressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage transition "no" is determined at the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the character 3 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the next stage is not shifted. In this case, the current level remains "2" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the level transition "yes" is determined. Also, the current stage remains at "2" even when the push button 9A is not operated.

Further, when the current stage is "3", the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "yes" is determined at the lottery rate of 16384/32768, characters 1 to 3 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to , the character 4 is displayed, and the next stage is entered. On the other hand, when the push operation button 9A is operated, but the step transition "no" is determined at the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the character 4 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the next step is not performed. In this case, the current level remains "3" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the level transition "yes" is determined. Further, even when the push button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains at "3".

Further, when the current stage is "4", the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "yes" is determined at the lottery rate of 16384/32768, characters 1 to 4 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to , the character 5 is displayed, and the next stage is entered. On the other hand, when the push operation button 9A is operated, but the stage transition "no" is determined at the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the character 5 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the next stage is not shifted. In this case, the current level remains "4" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the level transition "yes" is determined. The current stage remains at "4" even when the push button 9A is not operated.

Further, when the current stage is "5", the push-down operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "yes" is determined at the lottery rate of 16384/32768, characters 1 to 5 are displayed in the display area 4A. , character 6 is displayed, and the next stage is entered. On the other hand, when the depressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage transition "no" is determined at the lottery rate of 16384/32768, the character 6 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the next stage is not shifted. In this case, the current level remains "5" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the level transition "yes" is determined. Also, the current stage remains at "5" even if the push button 9A is not operated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, when the current stage is "6", the pressing operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "yes" is determined at the lottery rate of 14107/32768, the display The character 7 is displayed in addition to the characters 1 to 6 in the area 4A, and the process proceeds to the next step. On the other hand, when the depressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage transition "no" is determined at the lottery rate of 18661/32768, the character 7 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the next stage is not shifted. In this case, the current level remains "6" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the level transition "yes" is determined. Further, even if the push button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains at "6".

Further, when the current stage is "7", it means that it is the conditional stage transition period. In addition to ~7, character 8 is displayed, and the next stage is entered. On the other hand, if the push operation button 9A is operated before the conditional step transition period has elapsed, or if the push operation button 9A is not operated even after the conditional stage transition period has passed, the display area 4A Do not display character 7 and do not move to the next stage. In this case, the current stage remains "7". It should be noted that during this conditional stage transition period, the depression operation button 9A is disabled so that the contents of the operation-linked presentation are changed.

Further, when the current stage is "8", the push-down operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "yes" is determined at the lottery rate of 10922/32768, characters 1 to 8 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to , the character 9 is displayed, and the next stage is entered. On the other hand, when the push operation button 9A is operated, but the stage transition "no" is determined at the lottery rate of 21846/32768, the character 9 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the next stage is not shifted. In this case, the current level remains "8" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the level transition "yes" is determined. Further, even if the push button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains at "8".

Further, when the current level is "9", the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the level transition "yes" is determined at the lottery rate of 10922/32768, characters 1 to 9 are displayed in the display area 4A. , the character 10 is displayed, and the next stage is started. On the other hand, when the depressing operation button 9A is operated, but the stage transition "no" is determined at the lottery rate of 21846/32768, the character 10 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the next stage is not shifted. In this case, the current level remains "9" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the level transition "present" is determined. The current stage remains at "9" even when the push button 9A is not operated.

Further, when the current stage is "10", the push-down operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "yes" is determined at the lottery rate of 10922/32768, characters 1 to 10 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to , the character 11 is displayed, and the next stage is started. On the other hand, when the push operation button 9A is operated, but the stage transition "no" is determined at the lottery rate of 21846/32768, the character 11 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the next stage is not shifted. In this case, the current level remains "10" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the level transition "present" is determined. Also, the current stage remains at "10" even when the push button 9A is not operated.

Further, when the current stage is "11", the push operation button 9A is operated, and when the stage transition "yes" is determined at the lottery rate of 10922/32768, characters 1 to 11 are displayed in the display area 4A. In addition to , the character 12 is displayed, the operation interlocking performance is terminated, and the performance is developed into super reach C.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the push operation button 9A is operated, but the step transition "no" is determined at the lottery rate of 21846/32768, the character 12 is not displayed in the display area 4A and the next step is not performed. In this case, the current stage remains at "11" until the pressing operation button 9A is operated again and the stage transition "present" is determined. Further, even if the push button 9A is not operated, the current stage remains at "11". In "scenario 6 (failure)" to "scenario 10 (failure)", if the current stage is "11", even if the push operation button 9A is operated, the stage transition "yes" is determined. (See FIG. 18) so that the effect does not develop into Super Reach C (that is, the operation-linked effect fails).

Further, even if the current stage is any of "0" to "11", the operation-linked effect is terminated when the operation-linked effect effective time elapses. Therefore, when the player wants to confirm the final stage of the operation-linked effect, it is necessary to shift the stage quickly within the period obtained by subtracting the conditional stage transition period from the operation-linked effect effective time. Become. That is, in the stages other than the conditional stage transition period, the pressing operation button 9A is hit repeatedly so that the stage transition "yes" is quickly determined. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation using the operating means.

<RUSH Mode Scenario Determination Table>
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a RUSH mode scenario determination table. The RUSH mode scenario determination table is a table that is referred to in the depression operation button operation determination process (see FIGS. 45 and 46 described later) under the control of the sub CPU 71, and is determined according to various parameters such as the sub effect selection random number range. Information (RUSH mode scenario) is defined for determining the order in which fighting characters are determined in the “Kakekko Battle Reach” effect in the RUSH mode. Concrete control of the “running battle reach” effect using the table will be described later.

In the RUSH mode scenario determination table shown in FIG. 21, scenarios 1 to 24 are defined as scenarios during the RUSH mode in which the order of determination of the opponent characters is different, and a lottery value is defined for each of them. One of the scenarios is determined according to which range the effect selection random number range belongs to.

Here, as shown in FIG. 21, character 1 is relatively difficult to be determined compared to the other fighting characters (for example, scenarios 1 to 12), and in order to set all the fighting characters as victorious characters, is set to a high difficulty level. In that sense, character 1 can be called a special character.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 22 to 41. FIG.

[Main processing by main CPU]
22 and 23 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 61. FIG. This main process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 22, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs a watchdog timer disable setting process. When this process is finished, the process moves to S11.

In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input/output port setting processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in a power interruption detection state. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power failure detection state is present, and the process proceeds to S12. Move.

In S13, the main CPU 61 performs sub-control reception acceptance wait processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 waits until the sub-control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process is finished, the process moves to S14.

In S<b>14 , the main CPU 61 performs processing to permit writing to the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S15.

In S15, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, the process proceeds to S30 (see FIG. 23), and when it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, the process proceeds to S16. transfer processing.

In S16, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a power interruption detection flag. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that there is a power failure detection flag, it moves the process to S17, and if it determines that there is no power failure detection flag, it moves the process to S30 (see FIG. 23). .

In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process of checking the work area for damage and calculating a work damage check value. When this process is finished, the process moves to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is normal, the process proceeds to S19, and when it determines that the work damage check value is not normal, S30 (see FIG. ).

In S19, the main CPU 61 sets the stack pointer to 7FFEH. When this process is finished, the process moves to S20.

In S<b>20 , the main CPU 61 performs initial setting processing of the work area when power is restored. When this process is finished, the process moves to S21.

In S21, the main CPU 61 performs a probability variation state display notification setting process at the time of power restoration. Concretely, the main CPU 61 causes display to notify that the winning probability of the big win is in a high-probability state in the case of the variable-probability gaming state. When this process is finished, the process moves to S22. It should be noted that the notification display may be configured to end when the first variation starts or ends after the power is turned on.

In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command when power is restored. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command to the sub-control circuit 70 to return to the gaming state at the time of power failure. When this process is finished, the process moves to S23.

In S<b>23 , the main CPU 61 initializes the devices around the main CPU 61 . When this processing is finished, the processing is shifted to S24, and the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area is restored.

As shown in FIG. 23, in S30, the main CPU 61 sets the stack pointer to 8000H. When this process is finished, the process moves to S31.

In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to hit determination. When this process is finished, the process moves to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 61 performs all work area clear processing. When this process is finished, the process moves to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to hit determination. When this process is finished, the process moves to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting processing of the work area when initializing the RAM. When this process is finished, the process moves to S35.

At S<b>35 , the main CPU 61 performs processing for transmitting a command for initializing the main RAM 63 to the sub control circuit 70 . In the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. When this process is finished, the process moves to S36.

In S<b>36 , the main CPU 61 initializes the devices around the main CPU 61 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S37.

In S37, the main CPU 61 performs interrupt prohibition processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing for prohibiting interrupt processing. When this process is finished, the process moves to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 61 performs initial value random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process is finished, the process moves to S39.

At S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting interrupt processing. When this process is finished, the process moves to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect condition selection random number counter value. When this process is finished, the process moves to S41. In addition, in this process, the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection may be updated.

In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process proceeds to S42, and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If not, the process proceeds to S37.

In S<b>42 , the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub-control circuit 70, and a big winning opening for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening that is opened when a big win occurs. An open time timer, a security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when fraudulent activity is detected, etc. Execute processing to update the timer. When this process is finished, the process moves to S44.

At S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. Although details will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 61 generates a winning determination random number value and a winning symbol determination random number value according to detection signals from the first start winning opening switch 320 and the second start winning opening switch 330. is extracted, a jackpot determination table (not shown) stored in the main ROM 62 is referred to, it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is won, and the determination result is stored in the main RAM 63. conduct. Incidentally, the special symbol control processing of S44 will be described later using FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S45.

At S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the winning symbol or the winning symbol is to be selected based on the probability of winning the normal symbol (see FIG. 8) in response to the detection signal from the passage gate switch 350. Perform processing to store the result. When winning the normal symbol lottery, the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, and when not winning, the determination result indicating the losing symbol is stored. When the determination result indicating the winning pattern is stored, for example, the blade member 34 opens three times in 1.3 seconds, opens four times in 1.4 seconds, or opens six times in 1.8 seconds. do. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the blade member 34 is opened, and when the blade member 34 is in the open state, the game ball easily enters the second start port 33.例文帳に追加In addition, the main CPU 61 extracts a normal symbol determination random number value and a normal symbol determination random number value according to the detection signal from the passage gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random number value and the main ROM 62. Based on the normal symbol winning table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won, and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determination random number value, and the normal symbol determination table (not shown) stored in the main ROM 62 (abbreviated)) may be used to determine which of the losing symbols and the winning symbols should be used. When this process is finished, the process moves to S46.

At S46, the main CPU 61 performs symbol display device control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sends a control signal for driving the LED unit 5 to the main RAM 63 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the normal symbol control process. Perform processing to store. As a result, the LED unit 5 displays and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 based on the received control signal. In addition, the normal design display section 51 of the LED unit 5 performs variable display and stop display of the normal design based on the received control signal. When this process is finished, the process moves to S47.

At S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 generates data relating to game information signals to be transmitted to the machine computer or the hall computer 100 and stores the data in the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S48.

At S48, the main CPU 61 performs reserved symbol number data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 detects the first starting port switch 320 and the second Based on the detection signals from the starting port switch 330 and the passage gate switch 350, and the update result of the pending number data stored in the main RAM 63 which is updated according to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the first A process of storing control signals for driving the special symbol reservation display unit 55, the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 and the normal symbol reservation display unit 52 in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process is finished, the process moves to S49.

In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs the process of outputting the control signal stored in the main RAM 63 in the above steps and the like from each port. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs security signals to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80, LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LEDs, the first big winning opening shutter 36A and the second big winning opening shutter 36A. It supplies solenoid power for driving solenoids for opening and closing the mouth shutter 37A and for opening and closing the blade members 34 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S50.

At S50, the main CPU 61 performs a winning hole-related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling the winning hole-related command. When this process is finished, the process moves to S37.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the game processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by main CPU 61]
FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 61 . This timer interrupt processing is executed in the following steps. The main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute timer interrupt processing even when the main process is being executed. This timer interrupt processing is processing performed in response to a clock pulse generated every predetermined period (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 24, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs register save processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 saves the registers. When this process is finished, the process moves to S61.

In S61, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 increments the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by one, although the details will be described later. In addition, the system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process, etc.) on the condition that the timer interrupt process is activated a predetermined number of times (three times). The timer update processing of S61 will be described later using FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting clear data to the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the watchdog output data to clear data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64 . The initial reset circuit 64 releases the capacitor voltage based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the initial reset circuit 64 resets the main CPU 61. A system reset signal is output to . When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters a system reset state. When this process is finished, the process moves to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 61 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates the random number counter for the hit determination random number counter, the winning symbol determination random number counter, the ready-to-win determination counter, the effect selection counter, and the like. If the random number counter for winning determination and the random number counter for determining winning pattern are undefined, the timing of updating the counter value becomes unfair. I'm trying to update with. When this process is finished, the process moves to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 61 performs switch input processing. Although details will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each winning area or the like has detected a winning. For example, when detecting a prize, the main CPU 61 sets the bit corresponding to the prize area determined to have a prize to "1 (ON)". The switch input processing of S64 will be described later using FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S65.

At S65, the main CPU 61 performs payout control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks whether or not a game ball has entered the first big winning hole 36, the second big winning hole 37, the first starting hole 32, the second starting hole 33 and the general winning hole 40. When a prize is won, a corresponding payout request command is transmitted to the payout/emission control circuit 82 . That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out, from the payout device 83, a prize ball corresponding to the prize winning area in which the bit is "1 (ON)" as the game ball wins, and to the payout/launch control circuit 82. Also, when this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area that triggered the command setting is controlled to "0 (OFF)". When this process is finished, the process moves to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 via the command output port 66 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S67.

In S67, the main CPU 61 performs register return processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 restores the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this processing ends, this timer interrupt processing routine ends.

[Timer update process]
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing timer update processing executed by the main CPU 61 . This timer update process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 18, in S70, the main CPU 61 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of executions (activations) of timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, when the number of executions (activation) of timer interrupt processing reaches a predetermined condition (three times), predetermined processing (special symbol control processing, etc.) is executed. When this process is finished, the process moves to S71.

In S71, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the waiting time timer. The wait time timer is a timer for timing various execution wait times. When this process is finished, the process moves to S72.

In S72, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0". The residual ball monitoring timer is a ball path from the first big winning hole 36 to the first big winning hole count switch 360, and a ball path from the second big winning hole 37 to the second big winning hole count switch 370. A timer for measuring the remaining ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the remaining ball remaining in the. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0", it shifts the process to S77, and when it determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0". , S73. When the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0" and the round game is not in progress, and the big winning hole count switch detects a game ball, an error may be notified.

In S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the residual ball monitoring timer. When this process is finished, the process moves to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 61 again performs the process of determining whether or not the value of the remaining ball monitoring timer is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0", it shifts the process to S77, and when it determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0". , S75.

In S75, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area 38A is open. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the specific area 38A is not open, it shifts the process to S77, and when it determines that the specific area 38A is open, it shifts the process to S76.

At S76, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting specific area closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data for closing the specific area 38A and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on a control signal based on this data. Thereby, the displacement member 39 is driven to close the specific region 38A. When this process is finished, the process moves to S77. Thus, in the present embodiment, the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is set to "0" after the second big winning hole 37 ends the long opening (the interval of 27.948 seconds in the open state) and enters the closed state. Then, the specific region 38A is changed from the open state to the closed state by forcibly controlling the displacement member 39 from the operating state to the non-operating state. That is, the specific region 38A is in the closed state after being in the open state for a time slightly shorter than 29.144 s defined as the longest operating time by the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIG.

In S77, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". The ejection monitoring timer is a timer for measuring the ejection ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the ejection balls that enter the second big prize opening 37 and are ejected. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0", the process proceeds to S80, and if it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", S78. to process. In this embodiment, a smaller value (shorter time) is set for the residual ball monitoring timer than the discharge monitoring timer, but they may be set to the same value or a larger value (longer time).

In S78, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the discharge monitoring timer. When this process is finished, the process moves to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 61 performs the process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0" again. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", it terminates the timer update processing routine, and if it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0", moves the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is "10". The large winning opening opening number counter is a counter used to identify the 4th round of opening and closing of the second large winning opening 37 . Therefore, the value of the number of times of opening the big winning opening counter does not count the number of times that the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are actually opened, but is incremented by 1 for each round. be. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is not "4", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S82 and determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is "4". If so, the process proceeds to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, has a value (04H) indicating processing during the opening of the big winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, the main CPU 61 terminates this timer update processing routine, and the control state flag indicates the processing during opening of the large winning opening. If it is determined not to be the value (04H), the process proceeds to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is greater than the value of the discharged ball counter. The second big winning opening win counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the second big winning opening 37 detected by the second big winning opening count switch 370 . The discharged ball counter is a counter for counting the number of discharged game balls detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the second big winning opening winning counter and the value of the discharge ball counter are the same. In this process, if the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is not greater than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends this timer update processing routine, and the value of the second big winning opening winning counter increases. If it is greater than the value of the discharged ball counter, the process proceeds to S83. It should be noted that the value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from when the game ball is detected by the second big winning hole count switch 370 to when it is detected by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. equivalent to time. Therefore, if it is determined in this process that the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is greater than the value of the discharge ball counter, the second big winning opening due to clogged balls inside the second big winning opening 37 or a so-called hoax act. Detection of only the winning hole count switch 370 is assumed.

In S83, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an ejection error command. The ejection error command corresponds to a command for notifying that the paper has not been ejected normally. This ejection error command is transmitted in command transmission control processing in timer interrupt processing. When this process is finished, the process moves to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the second big winning opening winning counter to the discharged ball counter. This prevents repeated transmission of the eject error command. When this processing ends, the timer update processing routine ends. Note that the ejection error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing switch input processing executed by the main CPU 61 . This switch input processing is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 26, in S90, the main CPU 61 performs fraud detection switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks the detection states of a radio wave sensor capable of detecting radio waves, a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibration, and the like (not shown). When this process is finished, the process moves to S91. In addition, if any of the above sensors is in a state of detection, an error notification may be performed, and at that time, for example, even if the big winning opening count switch detects the winning of the game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may make it

At S91, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol-related switch check process. This special symbol related switch check process will be described later using FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S92.

At S92, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol-related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there has been an input from the passage gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a gaming ball has been detected. 4), and if it is determined to be the upper limit, this process is terminated. When it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, a process of outputting a detection signal is performed. When this process is finished, the process moves to S93.

At S93, the main CPU 61 performs prize ball-related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not there is an input from the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first start winning opening switch 320, and the second starting winning opening switch 330. When it is determined that there is an input of the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B, processing is performed to add 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter, and the first start winning opening switch 320 or the second start winning opening switch 320 When it is determined that there is an input of the starting opening winning opening switch 330, a process of adding 1 to the value of the corresponding starting opening winning opening counter is performed. When this processing is finished, this switch input processing routine is finished.

[Special symbol-related switch check processing]
FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing a special symbol-related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. As shown in FIG. This special symbol related switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 27, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs a first start opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a second start port switch check process. This processing will be described later using FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S102.

At S102, the main CPU 61 performs a first big winning opening switch check process. This processing will be described later using FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S103.

At S103, the main CPU 61 performs a second big winning opening switch check process. This processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, this special symbol related switch check process routine is finished.

[First starting port switch check process]
FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the first starting port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. As shown in FIG. This first starting port switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 28, at S110, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not winning of a game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected based on the detection signal from the first starting port switch 320. conduct. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 320 is "1 (ON)". When the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the processing is shifted to S111, and when the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this first starting opening End the switch check processing routine.

In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of starting memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of starting memories of the first special symbols, that is, the number of reservations is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of reservations is 4 or more, the first starting port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of reservations is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S112.

At S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of starting memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random number acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a winning determination random number value for a special symbol game from a winning determination random number counter by a so-called special symbol lottery, extracts a winning symbol determination random number value from a winning symbol determination random number counter, and further extracts a winning symbol determination random number value from a winning symbol determination random number counter. , a random number value for reach determination is extracted from the counter for reach determination, a random number value for effect selection is extracted from the counter for effect selection, and a process of storing the random value in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area includes the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and various types obtained by winning the game ball in the first start port 32 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Random numbers are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When this process is finished, the process moves to S114.

At S114, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S115.

At S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect based on a random number lottery. When this process is finished, the process moves to S116.

At S<b>116 , the main CPU 61 sets a starting winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . This starting winning command includes information indicating a winning determination random number and information indicating a winning symbol determining random number. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that the game ball has won a prize and whether the winning lottery result is correct or not. become. The start winning command data includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect that continues over a plurality of games when it is determined in the process of S115 that the winning effect is to be performed. As a result, so-called "prefetching effect" is possible, such as executing the effect based on the starting memory before executing the variation. When this processing ends, the first starting port switch check processing routine ends.

[Second start port switch check process]
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the second starting port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. As shown in FIG. This second starting port switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 29, at S120, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not winning of a game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 330. conduct. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330 is "1 (ON)". When the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is shifted to S121, and when the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this second starting opening End the switch check processing routine.

In S121, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of starting memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of starting memories of the second special symbols, that is, the number of reservations is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of reservations is 4 or more, the second starting port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of reservations is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S123.

At S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random number acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts a winning determination random number value for a special symbol game from a winning determination random number counter by a so-called special symbol lottery, extracts a winning symbol determination random number value from a winning symbol determination random number counter, and further extracts a winning symbol determination random number value from a winning symbol determination random number counter. , a random number value for reach determination is extracted from the counter for reach determination, a random number value for effect selection is extracted from the counter for effect selection, and a process of storing the random value in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In this embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area includes the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the hit determination random number is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various types obtained by winning the game ball in the second start port 33 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Random numbers are sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). When this process is finished, the process moves to S124.

At S124, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S125.

At S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform a winning effect based on a random number lottery. When this process is finished, the process moves to S126.

At S<b>126 , the main CPU 61 sets a starting winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . The start winning command is as described above. When this processing ends, the second starting port switch check processing routine ends.

[1st Grand Prize Opening Switch Check Processing]
FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the first big winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61 . This first big winning hole switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 30, at S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 36 is detected based on the detection signal from the first big winning hole count switch 360. process. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 36 is detected, the process proceeds to S131, and the winning of the game ball into the first big winning hole 36 is detected. If it is determined that it is not, the first big winning opening switch check processing routine is terminated.

In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the first big winning opening winning counter. The first big winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process is finished, the process moves to S132.

At S<b>132 , the main CPU 61 sets the first big winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . The first big winning hole winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 controls the winning of the game ball to the first big winning hole 36. come to recognize. As a result, for example, the total number of payouts (the number of payout prize balls) can be added and displayed during the RUSH mode. When this process ends, the first big winning opening switch check process routine ends.

[Second Grand Prize Opening Switch Check Processing]
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the second big winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61 . This second big winning hole switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 31, at S140, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball into the second big winning hole 37 is detected based on the detection signal from the second big winning hole count switch 370. process. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball into the second big winning hole 37 is detected, the process proceeds to S141, and the winning of the game ball into the second big winning hole 37 is detected. If it is determined that it will not be performed, the process proceeds to S143.

At S141, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the second big winning opening winning counter. The second big winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process is finished, the process moves to S142.

At S<b>142 , the main CPU 61 sets a second big winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . The second big winning hole winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 controls the winning of the game ball to the second big winning hole 37. come to recognize. This also makes it possible to add and display the total number of payouts (the number of payout prize balls) during the RUSH mode, for example. When this process is finished, the process moves to S143.

At S143, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not a V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A is detected based on the detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A has been detected, the process proceeds to S144 and determines that the V winning of the game ball to the specific area 38A has not been detected. If so, the process moves to S152.

At S144, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharged ball counter. When this process is finished, the process moves to S145.

At S145, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is "4". The big winning opening opening number counter is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is not "4", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S152 and determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is "4". If so, the process proceeds to S146.

At S146, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, has a value (04H) indicating processing during the opening of the big winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag has a value (04H) indicating the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, it shifts the process to S149, ), the process proceeds to S147.

In S147, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a control state flag, which will be described later, has a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before resuming the big winning opening or a value (06H) indicating the winning interval management process. I do. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is "05H" or "06H", the process proceeds to S148. moves the process to S152.

In S148, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is greater than "0". The discharge monitoring timer is as described above. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is greater than "0", it moves the process to S149, and if it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not greater than "0". , the process proceeds to S152. In this process, if it is determined that the value of the emission monitoring timer is not greater than "0", it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred, and an error command is sent to the sub-control circuit 70 to notify the error. You may make it

In S149, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the specific area passage flag is "01H". The specific area passage flag is an internal flag that is set to a value of "01H" when the game ball's V prize is detected by the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area passage flag is "01H", the process proceeds to S152, and when it determines that the value of the specific area passage flag is not "01H" , S150.

In S150, the main CPU 61 sets the value of the specific area passage flag to "01H". The value "01H" of the specific area passage flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the variable probability game state is determined after the end of the big hit game state. When this process is finished, the process moves to S151.

In S151, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a specific area passage command. The specific area passing command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed (V winning) with respect to the specific area 38A. The specific area pass command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the V winning to the specific area 38A. When this process is finished, the process moves to S152.

At S152, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected based on the detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball through the non-specific area 38B is detected, the process proceeds to S153, and determines that the passage of the game ball through the non-specific area 38B is not detected. If so, the process proceeds to S154.

At S153, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharged ball counter. When this process is finished, the process moves to S154.

At S154, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharged ball counter. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the game ball is detected only by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B without being detected by the second big winning hole count switch 370. judge. In this process, if the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is not smaller than the value of the discharged ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends this second big winning opening switch check processing routine, If the winning counter value is smaller than the discharged ball counter value, the process proceeds to S155.

At S155, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an ejection error command. The ejection error command is as described above. When this process is finished, the process moves to S156.

At S156, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the second big winning opening winning counter to the discharged ball counter. This prevents repeated transmission of the eject error command. When this processing ends, the second big winning opening switch check processing routine ends. Note that the ejection error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S156.

[Special symbol control process]
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. As shown in FIG. This special symbol control process is executed in units of the following steps. In FIG. 32, the numerical values shown beside S161 to S168 indicate the control state flags corresponding to those steps, which are stored in the control state flag storage area of the main RAM 63. FIG. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63 . As a result, the special symbol game proceeds.

As shown in FIG. 32, in first S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S161.

In S161 to S168, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any of the processes from S161 to S168. In addition to that, the main CPU 61 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes timer interrupt processing at predetermined intervals.

At S161, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage check process. Details of S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S162.

At S162, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management to the control status flag when the control state flag is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management and the variation time has elapsed. set, and set the waiting time (for example, 540 ms) to the waiting time timer. In other words, the setting is made so that the process of S163 is executed after the post-confirmation waiting time has elapsed. Details of S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S163.

At S163, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a big hit has occurred when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time has elapsed after confirmation. The main CPU 61 sets the value (03H) indicating the winning start interval management in the control state flag and sets the time corresponding to the winning start interval in the waiting time timer in the case of a big win. That is, after the time corresponding to the winning start interval has passed, the process of S164 is set to be executed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the big win is not achieved. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. Details of S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S164.

In S164, the main CPU 61 executes winning start interval management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads out the first big prize from the main ROM 62 when the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating winning start interval management and the time corresponding to the winning start interval has passed. Data for opening the opening shutter 36A and the second prize winning opening shutter 37A and data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM63. Then, in the process of S49 in FIG. 23, the main CPU 61 stores the data for opening the first big winning opening shutter 36A and the second big winning opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63 and the displacement member 39. Data for opening is read, and a control signal based on these data is supplied to the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A and the displacement member solenoid 390. As a result, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the first big prize winning port 36 and the second big winning prize port 37 . Details of S164 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S165.

At S165, the main CPU 61 executes waiting time management processing before reopening the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61, when the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before re-opening of the big winning opening, and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds (interval patterns a to c) has passed, The memory is updated so as to increase the number of times counter for opening the big winning opening by "1". The main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (04H) indicating that the big winning hole is open. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.996 seconds of opening/closing pattern A) to the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S166. In this processing, the main CPU 61 also performs processing for controlling the opening and closing of the displacement member 39 . Details of S165 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S166.

At S166, the main CPU 61 executes a process during the opening of the big winning opening. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open, the main CPU 61 sets the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more, and the opening upper limit time has passed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the special winning opening opening time timer is "0" is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates the variables located in the main RAM 63 in order to close the first big winning hole 36 or the second big winning hole 37 when any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is greater than or equal to the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened (it is the final round) is met. The main CPU 61 sets a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval in the control state flag if it is the final round, and a value (05H) that indicates waiting time management before reopening the big winning opening if it is not the final round. to the control state flag. The details of S166 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S167.

At S167, the main CPU 61 executes a winning end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 changes the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game to the control state when the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval and the time corresponding to the winning end interval has elapsed. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. Details of S167 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S168.

At S168, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol game end processing. In this process, when the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game, the main CPU 61 performs the process at the end of the special symbol game (for example, 1 indicating the end of one game from the external terminal board 80). Processing for outputting a game end signal or a jackpot signal indicating that the jackpot game state is in progress) is executed, and a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check is set. In other words, it is set to execute the process of S161. Details of S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol control process routine is finished.

As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags to (00H), (01H), (02H), and (07H) in order when the result of the win determination is a loss in the case where the game is not in the jackpot game state. As a result, the processes of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 32 are executed at predetermined timings. In addition, in the case where the game state is not the jackpot game state, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to (00H), (01H), and (02H) in order when the result of the hit determination is the jackpot, so that S161 shown in FIG. , S162, and S163 are executed at a predetermined timing, and a big hit game state is started. Furthermore, in the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags to (03H), (04H), and (05H) in this order, so that the processing of S164, S166, and S165 shown in FIG. , and the jackpot game state is executed. In addition, when the end condition of the jackpot game state is satisfied, by setting (04H), (06H), and (07H) in order, the processing of S165, S167 to S168 shown in FIG. Then, the jackpot game state is terminated.

[Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. As shown in FIG. This special symbol storage check process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 33, at S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag has a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the process proceeds to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, it ends this special symbol storage check processing routine.

At S171, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a start memory. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is no special symbol game start memory, that is, the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory. When data is not stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is shifted to S172. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is start memory, the process proceeds to S173.

At S172, the main CPU 61 performs a demonstration display process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 63 . Furthermore, the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area in which the random number value for hit determination is stored) becomes "0" for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If it is maintained, a value that permits execution of the demonstration display is set as the demonstration display permission value. Then, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a demonstration display command when the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value. The demonstration display command thus stored is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a demonstration display command. As a result, the demonstration display is executed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. FIG. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check process routine ends.

At S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the starting memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether there is data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". That is, when it is determined that data is not stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is moved to S174. If it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, the data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), The process is moved to S175.

At S174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating a variation of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 as the variation state number. When this process is finished, the process moves to S176.

At S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating a variation of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 as the variation state number. When this process is finished, the process moves to S176.

At S176, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process is finished, the process moves to S177.

At S177, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 stores each of the data in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as the first special symbol. Execute the process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3), and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area. Execute the process of shifting (storing) each of the data from (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3). do. When this process is finished, the process moves to S178.

At S178, the main CPU 61 executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) having different numbers of jackpot determination values (jackpot determination values) depending on whether the gaming state flag indicates a variable probability gaming state. Select a judgment table. That is, if the game state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and if the game state flag is not a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value A big hit determination table for non-probability variable gaming state with less is referred to. Thus, if the game state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, that is, if the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state as a special game state that tends to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state), to the big hit game state The probability of shifting is improved from the non-probability variable game state as a non-special game state that is less likely to shift to the specific game state than the probability variable game state as the special game state.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the special game state, if the probability variation / time-saving gaming state (eg 1 to 20 times of RUSH mode), or probability variation / non-time-saving gaming state (eg special mode), non The special game state may be a non-probability variable/non-time-saving game state (eg, normal mode) or a non-probability-variable/time-saving gaming state (eg, 21st to 100th RUSH mode).

Then, the main CPU 61 extracts when the game ball wins, and the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0) is used for hit determination. Refer to the random value and the selected jackpot determination table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big win when the hit determination random value and the big win determination value match. In other words, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to set a big win game state that is advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the jackpot probability of winning the first starting port 32 in the normal game state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning the second starting port 33 . The probability of winning a prize to the first starting port 32 in the normal game state may be larger or smaller than the probability of winning a prize to the second starting port 33 .

Thus, in the processing of S178, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process is finished, the process moves to S179.

At S179, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines a big-hit symbol if the result of the big-hit determination is a big-hit win, and determines a losing symbol if the result is a loss. Details of S179 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S180.

At S180, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects the variation pattern determination table based on the game state (mode), the result of the big hit determination (hit-lose), and the ready-to-win determination random number value. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the effect selection random number value and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . The main CPU 61 determines the variable display mode of the special symbols in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 based on the data indicated by such variation patterns. Various parameters used for determining the variation pattern are acquired when winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33 is detected (S113 in FIG. 28 or S123 in FIG. 29). See), it is also possible to configure the variation pattern to be determined when the winning of the game ball to the first start port 32 or the second start port 33 is detected.

Data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied to the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54 of the LED unit 5 . As a result, the special symbols are variably displayed in the determined variation pattern in the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 . Further, the data indicating the stored variation pattern is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a variation pattern specification command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When this process is finished, the process moves to S181.

At S181, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern in the waiting time timer, and executes the process of clearing the storage area used for the current variation display. When this process is finished, the process moves to S182.

Then, in S182, the main CPU 61 executes a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variable display. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check process routine ends.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing special symbol determination processing executed by the main CPU 61. As shown in FIG. This special symbol determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 34, at S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not a big hit has been achieved. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, the process proceeds to S191. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is no big hit, the process proceeds to S198.

At S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the big hit variation state number determined at S190 is a value (01H) indicating variation of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S192 when the variation state number is a value (01H) indicating the variation of the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the variation state number is not the value (01H) indicating the variation of the first special symbol, that is, the main CPU 61 determines that the variation state number is the value (02H) that indicates the variation of the second special symbol. If so, the process proceeds to S194.

At S192, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a jackpot symbol of the first special symbol based on the winning symbol determination random number value. In this process, the main CPU 61 generates the first special symbol big-hit symbol (shown in the first special symbol big-hit symbol distribution in FIG. A process for determining a symbol corresponding to one of jackpots 1 to 6 is performed. When this process is finished, the process moves to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the determined first special symbol for the jackpot symbol and sets the command for the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big-hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the first special symbol display section 53 . The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Also, the main CPU 61 sets a command for the first special symbol jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification pattern (decorative pattern) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process moves to S196.

At S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 generates the second special symbol big-hit symbol (shown in the second special symbol big-hit symbol distribution in FIG. The process of determining the symbols corresponding to the jackpots 6 to 9) is performed. When this process is finished, the process moves to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the determined second special symbol for the jackpot symbol and sets the command for the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display section 54 . The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Also, the main CPU 61 sets a command for the second special symbol jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification pattern (decorative pattern) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process moves to S196.

At S196, the main CPU 61 performs a win start interval display time data set process corresponding to the win symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the winning start interval display time data corresponding to the big winning symbol in the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S197.

At S197, the main CPU 61 performs a data setting process related to the number of openings of the big winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 collects data related to the number of openings of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37, that is, big wins 1 to 6 according to the first special symbol, or the second special symbol. The data corresponding to the jackpots 6 to 9 are set in the main RAM 63. When this process is finished, this special symbol determination process routine is finished.

On the other hand, in S198, when the main CPU 61 determines in S190 that it is not a big hit, that is, that it is a loss, it sets the data of the losing pattern and sets the command of the losing pattern. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display section 53 or the second special symbol display section 54 . The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the special symbols and stops and displays them in a mode based on the data of the missing symbols of the special symbols. Also, the main CPU 61 sets a command for a missing symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification pattern (decorative pattern) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the display mode of stop losing. When this process is finished, this special symbol determination process routine is finished.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 35, at S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) indicates special symbol variation time management, the process proceeds to S211. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) does not indicate special symbol variation time management, it ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

In S211, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to S212. When it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol variation time management processing routine is terminated.

In S212, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and shifts the process to S213.

At S213, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63 . The symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub-control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command, so that the sub-control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process is finished, the process moves to S214.

In S<b>214 , the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the waiting time after determination in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the special symbol variation time management process routine is finished.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 36, at S220, the main CPU 61 performs processing for determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management processing. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, it ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

At S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". The main CPU 61 shifts the process to S222 when the value of the waiting time timer is "0". On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 terminates the special symbol display time management processing routine.

At S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. The main CPU 61 shifts the process to S223 when judging that it is a big hit. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to S224.

At S223, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes the process of setting the value (00H) indicating the non-probability variable/non-time-saving gaming state to the gaming state flag. When this process is completed, the process moves to S234.

In S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". The time saving number counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games (symbol variation number) in the time saving game state. The main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228 when the value of the time saving number counter is "0". On the other hand, when the value of the time saving number counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving number counter. When this process is finished, the process moves to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 61 again determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". The main CPU 61 shifts the process to S227 when the value of the time saving number counter is "0". On the other hand, when the value of the time saving number counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228.

In S227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a time saving end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a time saving end command indicating the end of the time saving game state in the main RAM 63 . Then, the time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the game state, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the time saving game state. Become. When this process is finished, the process moves to S232.

In S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the variable probability counter is "0". The probability variation number counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games (symbol variation number) in the probability variation gaming state. The main CPU 61 shifts the process to S233 when the value of the probability variation counter is "0". On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S229.

In S229, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the variable probability counter. When this process is finished, the process moves to S230.

In S230, the main CPU 61 again determines whether or not the value of the variable probability counter is "0". The main CPU 61 shifts the process to S231 when the value of the probability variation number counter is "0". On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S233.

In S231, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a variable probability end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) in the main RAM 63 a variable probability end command indicating the end of the variable probability gaming state. Then, the variable probability end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub-control circuit 70 as a command indicating the gaming state, so that the sub-control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the variable probability gaming state. Become. When this process is finished, the process moves to S232.

At S232, the main CPU 61 performs processing for clearing the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 sets the game state flag to a value (01H) indicating the non-variable/time-saving gaming state when the variable-probability/time-saving gaming state ends in the probability-variable/time-saving gaming state (03H). In the state (02H), when the probability variable gaming state ends, the game state flag is set to a value (00H) indicating the non-probability variable / non-time-saving gaming state, and in the non-probability variation / time-saving gaming state (01H), the time-saving gaming state is completed, a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a non-probability variable/non-time-saving gaming state to the gaming state flag is executed. When this process is finished, the process moves to S233.

At S233, the main CPU 61 sets a control state flag of the main RAM 63 to a value (07H) indicating the end processing of the special symbol game. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

At S234, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the winning start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S235. In this embodiment, when the jackpot pattern is the first special pattern "jackpot 1" and the second special pattern "jackpot 6", 9996 ms is set as the hit start interval time, and other jackpot patterns. In this case, if it is a winning start time from a non-time-saving game state, 9996ms is set as a winning start interval time, and if it is a winning start time from a time-saving gaming state, 3996ms is set as a winning start interval time. be.

At S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a winning start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the winning start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub-control circuit 70, so that the sub-control circuit 70 recognizes the start of the big win gaming state. The winning start display command includes data indicating the start of the big winning game state and a specific winning pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern in the big win game state based on the data indicating the win pattern included in the win start display command. When this process is finished, the process moves to S236.

At S236, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the big winning opening opening number counter. When this process is finished, the process moves to S237.

At S237, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a control state flag of the main RAM 63 to a value (03H) indicating the winning start interval management process. When this process ends, the special symbol display time management process routine ends.

[Hit start interval management process]
FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the winning start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. As shown in FIG. This winning start interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 37, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the winning start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the win start interval management process, the process proceeds to S241. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the winning start interval management process, the main CPU 61 ends the winning start interval management process routine.

In S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the win start interval time is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to S242. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the winning start interval management processing routine.

In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number counter in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and shifts the process to S243.

In S243, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of times counter for opening the big winning opening, and shifts the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) winning pattern data indicating a big winning opening opening/closing pattern corresponding to the type of the big winning symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . Displacement member actuation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the jackpot symbol determined in S244. When this process is finished, the process moves to S245.

At S<b>245 , the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting (storing) a command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . In this case, the display command during opening of the big winning opening is data indicating the start of the round game. The display command during opening of the big winning opening is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the big winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S247.

At S<b>247 , the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the big winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S248.

At S<b>248 , the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the discharged ball counter in the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S249.

At S249, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening in the main RAM 63. FIG. The value of the waiting time timer is set to 27.996 s if the time corresponding to the value (number of rounds) of the large winning opening opening number counter, for example, if the jackpot pattern of the first special pattern is "jackpot 1". When this process is finished, the process moves to S250.

At S<b>250 , the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting data during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables located in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first big winning hole 36 or the second big winning hole 37 . The variables stored in this way drive the first big winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second big winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37. Become. When this processing ends, the winning start interval management processing routine ends.

[Waiting time management process before reopening the big winning gate]
FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing waiting time management processing before reopening of the big winning opening executed by the main CPU 61 . This waiting time management process before re-opening of the big winning opening is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 38, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, the process proceeds to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management process routine before reopening the big winning opening.

In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the inter-round interval display time is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to S262. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the big winning opening.

At S<b>262 , the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the counter for the number of openings of the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S263.

In S<b>263 , the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting (storing) a command for displaying during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . In this case, the display command during opening of the big winning opening is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a large winning opening open display command. When this process is finished, the process moves to S264.

In S264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the big winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S265.

At S265, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the big winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S266.

At S<b>266 , the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the discharged ball counter in the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S267.

At S267, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening in the main RAM 63. FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S268.

At S<b>268 , the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting data during opening of the big winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the waiting time management process routine before reopening the big winning opening is finished.

[Processing during the opening of the big winning opening]
FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the processing during opening of the big winning opening executed by the main CPU 61 . This process during the opening of the big winning opening is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 39, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag has a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the big winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, the process proceeds to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the big winning opening, it ends the processing routine during opening of the big winning opening.

In S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than "8". In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than "8", the process proceeds to S272. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big winning opening winning counter is not equal to or greater than "8", the process proceeds to S274.

In S272, the main CPU 61 executes the big winning opening opening/closing process according to the set opening/closing pattern for each round for the type of jackpot and the current round, and shifts the process to S273.

At S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to S274. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine during opening of the big winning opening.

At S274, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting big winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variables located in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the big winning slot. The variables stored in this way are for closing the first big winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second big winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. When this process is finished, the process moves to S275.

At S275, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value to the residual ball monitoring timer. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1098 ms is set as the predetermined value. When this process is finished, the process moves to S276.

At S<b>276 , the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the closed big winning opening is the second big winning opening 37 . When the main CPU 61 determines that the closed big winning hole is the second big winning hole 37, the process proceeds to S277. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the closed big winning hole is not the second big winning hole 37, that is, the first big winning hole 36, the process proceeds to S278.

At S277, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a predetermined value to the discharge monitoring timer. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1998 ms is set as the predetermined value. If this process has ended, the process moves to S278.

In S278, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the number of large winning opening openings (the number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the large winning gate open number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit value of the number of times the large winning gate is opened (the number of rounds), and determines the value of the large winning gate open number counter. is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening. Here, the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening is 12 times (12R). When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the big winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the winning opening opening number, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S282. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the number of opening large winning openings, the process proceeds to S279.

In S279, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the waiting time timer value as the inter-round interval display time in the main RAM 63 based on the winning pattern and the number of rounds. That is, the time corresponding to one of the interval patterns ac is set based on the winning pattern and the current number of rounds (see FIG. 11). Note that the inter-round interval display time may be set to a time different from the time corresponding to the interval patterns ac. When this process is finished, the process moves to S280.

At S280, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting a value (05H) indicating waiting time management processing before reopening the big winning opening to a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S281.

In S<b>281 , the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 . When this process is finished, the process routine during opening of the big winning opening is finished.

On the other hand, in S282, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the winning end interval display time in the main RAM 63. FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S283. In addition, in this embodiment, when it is the end of the hit from the non-time-saving gaming state, the jackpot pattern is the first special pattern "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 4" and the second special pattern "jackpot 6". If ~ "jackpot 9", 9996ms is set as the hit end interval display time, and if the jackpot pattern is the first special pattern "jackpot 5" to "jackpot 7", 6000ms is set as the hit end interval display time. In the case of the end of winning from the non-time-saving game state, 3996 ms is set as the winning end interval display time regardless of the jackpot pattern.

In S283, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a winning end interval management process in a predetermined area functioning as a control status flag in the main RAM 63 to the control status flag. When this process is finished, the process moves to S284.

At S<b>284 , the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a win end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 . The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big win gaming state. When this process is finished, the process routine during opening of the big winning opening is finished.

[Hit End Interval Management Processing]
FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the winning end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. As shown in FIG. This winning end interval management process is executed in the following steps.

In S290, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval management process, the process proceeds to S291. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (06H) indicating the winning end interval management process, the process proceeds to S298.

In S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the winning end interval display time is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the process proceeds to S292. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S298.

At S292, the main CPU 61 sets the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 to the special symbol control state flag. If this process has ended, the process moves to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 is "01H". If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is "01H", the process proceeds to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passing flag is not "01H", the process proceeds to S295.

At S294, the main CPU 61 sets the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to "02H", sets the value of the variable probability number counter of the main RAM 63 to "20", and sets the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 to "00H". process. In addition, "02H" of the game state flag indicates the variable probability game state. If this process has ended, the process moves to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to end the winning patterns 5 to 7, that is, to end the big win game state based on the "big win 5" to "big win 7" of the first special symbols. conduct. If it is determined that it is time to end the winning patterns 5 to 7, the process proceeds to S296. If it is determined that the winning patterns 5 to 7 are not finished, the process proceeds to S297.

In S296, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the end of the jackpot game state shifted from the normal game state, that is, the non-probability variable/non-time-saving game state. If it is determined that the win is in the normal game state, the process proceeds to S298. If it is determined that there is no win in the normal game state, the process proceeds to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 61 sets the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to "01H" and sets the value of the time saving number counter of the main RAM 63 to "100". In addition, "01H" of the game state flag indicates a time-saving game state. In addition, when "02H" (00000010B) is set as the game state flag and "01H" (00000001B) is set as the game state flag, the game state flag is "03H" indicating the probability variable/time saving game state. ” (00000011B). If this process has ended, the process moves to S298.

At S298, the main CPU 61 sets a game state command and terminates the winning end interval management processing routine. The game state command is a command including information indicating the type of the finished winning game state in addition to information indicating the game state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot game state and the remaining number of times as the number of times of time saving, and the main control circuit 60 By supplying from the main CPU 61 to the sub-CPU 71 of the sub-control circuit 70, the sub-control circuit 70 recognizes the gaming state after the big win.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 61. As shown in FIG. This special symbol game ending process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 41, in S300, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game ending process, the process proceeds to S301. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is not the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 ends this special symbol game end processing routine.

In S301, the main CPU 61 executes the special symbol game end processing according to the set opening/closing pattern for each round for the type of jackpot and the current round, and shifts the processing to S302. In this special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 executes processing for outputting a 1-game end signal or a jackpot signal from the external terminal board 80 to the hall computer 100 .

In S302, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this processing ends, the special symbol game end processing routine is ended.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 42 to 55. FIG. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as display control processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the sub CPU 71 . This main process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 42, in S310, the sub CPU 71 performs initialization processing upon power-on. When this process is finished, the process moves to S311.

In S311, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the random number value (random number counter value for effect determination, random number counter value for stop symbol determination, etc.) stored in the work RAM 73 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S312.

In S312, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although the details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing the command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 73 . If this process has ended, the process moves to S313. Note that the command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG.

In S313, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for displaying in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76 . A display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor) outputs various image data such as identification pattern data, background image data, image data for effect, etc., based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71. The images are read out from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. FIG. If this process has ended, the process moves to S314.

In S<b>314 , the sub CPU 71 performs audio control processing for controlling sounds generated from the speakers 10 a , 10 b , 10 c via the audio control circuit 77 . If this process has ended, the process moves to S315.

In S<b>315 , the sub CPU 71 executes lamp control processing for controlling light emission (lighting/blinking) of the lamp/LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78 . If this process has ended, the process moves to S316.

In S<b>316 , the sub CPU 71 performs movable effect device control processing via the movable effect device control circuit 79 . In this processing, the sub CPU 71 executes control processing for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process is finished, the process moves to S311, and thereafter the processes of S311 to S316 are repeated.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the command reception interrupt process or the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. Command reception interrupt processing will be described below with reference to FIG. 43, and timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing command reception interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71 . This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 43, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving registers. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is finished, the process moves to S321.

In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 stores the input command in the receive buffer area of the work RAM 73 . For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60 . In this process, the stored commands are analyzed by the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S320 to each register. When this processing ends, the command reception interrupt processing routine ends.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. As shown in FIG. This timer interrupt processing is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 44, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving registers. In this process, the sub CPU 71 saves the values used in the program being executed and stored in each register (storage area). When this process is finished, the process moves to S331.

In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating (addition/subtraction) the value of the timer set for effect control. When this process is finished, the process moves to S332.

In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs pressing operation button operation determination processing. The details of this process will be described later, but the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting whether or not the depression operation button 9A and the jog dial 9B have been operated. If this process has ended, the process moves to S333. The pressing operation button operation determination process will be described later using FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG.

In S333, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S330 to each register. When this processing ends, the timer interrupt processing routine ends.

[Determination process for pressing operation button operation]
45 and 46 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. FIG. This command analysis process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 45, in S340, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not an operation-linked effect is being performed. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the operation-linked consecutive output is being executed based on the determination of "04H", "08H", or "12H" as the variation pattern. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect is being performed, the process proceeds to S341. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect is not being performed, the process proceeds to S359 (see FIG. 46).

In S341, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is during the conditional stage transition period. As described above, during the conditional stage transition period, even if the pressing operation button 9A is pressed during the conditional stage transition period, the next stage is not transitioned, but the conditional stage transition period has elapsed. This period is provided so that the next step is always performed when the pressing operation button 9A is subsequently pressed (see FIGS. 18 to 20). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the conditional stage transition period is in progress, the process proceeds to S342. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not in the conditional stage transition period, the process proceeds to S344.

In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the operation-linked effect valid time has elapsed. Here, the operation-linked effect effective time is a time predetermined as a time during which the operation-linked effect can be performed within the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern, and can be set to "28000 ms", for example. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed, the process proceeds to S356. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect effective time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to S343.

In S343, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of invalidating the pressed operation button. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of invalidating the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A. It should be noted that in this process, the detection by the depression operation button SW90A may be invalidated, or the number of operations of the depression operation button may not be stored in the work RAM73. Further, in this process, instead of invalidating the pressing operation of the pressing operation button 9A, a process of setting the lottery rate at which stage transition "yes" is determined as 0/32768 may be performed. In other words, the lottery rate may be set so that the step transition “yes” is not determined when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed. When this process is finished, this pressing operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S344, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the conditional stage transition period has ended. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines that the current stage in the determined operation-linked effect scenario is the stage set as the conditional stage transition period, and the period set as the conditional stage transition period (for example, 1.5 seconds). ) is performed. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the conditional stage transition period has ended, the process proceeds to S345. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the conditional stage transition period has not ended, the process proceeds to S350. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the conditional stage transition period has ended, the sub CPU 71 may perform the processes of S348 and S349 without performing the process of S347, which will be described later. In other words, the sub CPU 71 may make sure to shift to the next stage, if any, when the conditional stage transition period ends.

In S345, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of activating the push operation button. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of validating the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A. Note that in this process, instead of activating the pressing operation on the pressing button 9A, a process of setting the lottery rate at which stage transition "yes" is determined as 32768/32768 may be performed. In other words, the lottery rate may be set so that when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed, the stage transition "yes" is always determined. If this process has ended, the process proceeds to S346. It should be noted that when the conditional stage transition period has ended, the pressing operation of the pressing operation button 9A is validated once in this process, and then it is determined again in the process of S344 that the conditional stage transition period has ended. In this case, the process may be moved to S346 without performing this process again.

In S346, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the operation-linked effect valid time has elapsed. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed, the process proceeds to S356. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect effective time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to S347.

In S347, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an operation of the pressing operation button. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the push operation button 9A has been pushed. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the depression operation button is operated, the process proceeds to S348. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the pressed operation button has not been operated, the sub CPU 71 ends this pressed operation button operation determination processing routine. In this process, the sub CPU 71 may shift the process to S355 when determining that the pressing operation button has not been operated. That is, if the depression operation button 9A is not operated after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed, the operation-linked effect may be ended.

In S348, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a next stage. In this embodiment, since the stages in the operation-linked effect are set to 0 to 11 stages (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the sub CPU 71 determines whether the current stage is the 11th stage in this process. Perform processing to determine When the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a next stage, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S349. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no next stage, the process proceeds to S376 (see FIG. 46).

In S349, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for shifting the stage of the operation-linked effect to the next stage. For example, when "scenario 1 (success)" is determined as the operation-linked effect scenario and the conditional stage transition period is the 7th stage, the sub CPU 71 shifts to the 8th stage of the operation-linked effect. process to cause When this process is finished, this pressing operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S350, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the operation-linked effect valid time has elapsed. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed, the process proceeds to S356. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect effective time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to S351.

In S351, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an operation of the pressing operation button. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the push operation button 9A has been pushed. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the depression operation button has been operated, the process proceeds to S352. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the pressed operation button has not been operated, the sub CPU 71 ends this pressed operation button operation determination processing routine.

In S352, the sub CPU 71 refers to the operation-linked effect stage transition determination table shown in FIG. 18, and performs processing for determining whether or not to transition from the current stage to the next stage. If this process has ended, the process moves to S353.

In S353, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the decision result in the process of S352 indicates that there is a stage transition (that is, a transition to the next stage). In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a stage transition (that is, it is determined that the stage transition is “yes”), the process proceeds to S354. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no stage transition (that is, "no" stage transition is determined), the sub CPU 71 terminates this depression operation button operation determination processing routine.

In S354, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not there is a next stage. As described above, in this process, the sub CPU 71 performs the process of determining whether or not the current stage is the 11th stage. When the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a next stage, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S355. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no next stage, the process proceeds to S376 (see FIG. 46).

In S355, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to shift the stage of the operation-linked effect to the next stage. When this process is finished, this pressing operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S356, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the variation pattern is an operation-linked effect success. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the variation pattern is "08H" or "12H" (see FIG. 12). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern is the success of the operation-linked effect, the process proceeds to S357. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the operation-linked effect is not successful in the variation pattern, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S358.

In S357, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data of "failure in operation interlocking effect→reversal" and performs a process of shifting to super ready-to-win C. "Operation interlocking production failure → reversal" production data, even if the variation pattern is an operation interlocking production success, if the operation interlocking production effective time elapses before moving to the final production stage, the operation interlocking Although the performance is a failure, it is the performance data for performing the performance indicating that the variation performance will develop into Super Reach C. When this process is finished, this pressing operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S358, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the "operation-linked effect failure" effect data. The "operation-linked effect failure" effect data is an effect for performing an effect indicating that the operation-linked effect will fail when the operation-linked effect is failed in the variation pattern and the operation-linked effect effective time has elapsed. Data. When this process is finished, this pressing operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

As shown in FIG. 46, in S359, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not it is time to shift to the RUSH mode. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is time to start the time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is time to shift to the RUSH mode, the process proceeds to S360. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not time to shift to the RUSH mode, the process proceeds to S369.

In S360, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of displaying a handover selection operation screen for the winning character history. Details of this handover selection operation screen will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S361. It should be noted that after the takeover selection operation screen is displayed once in this process, if it is determined that it is time to shift to the RUSH mode in the process of S359 again, the process is moved to S361 without performing this process again. can be

In S361, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the player has performed a handover selection operation. For example, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not handover of a winning character is selected by rotating the jog dial 9B and determined by pressing the pressing operation button 9A. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there has been a handover selection operation, the process proceeds to S366. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no takeover selection operation, the process proceeds to S362.

In S362, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the handover selection operation valid time has elapsed. Here, the takeover selection operation valid time is a predetermined time as a time during which the takeover selection operation can be performed, and can be set to "10000 ms", for example. It should be noted that the handover selection operation may be enabled during the winning end interval display time. In this case, any time equal to or less than the winning end interval display time may be set as the takeover selection operation valid time. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the handover selection operation valid time has passed, the process proceeds to S363. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the takeover selection operation valid time has not passed, it ends this depression operation button operation determination processing routine.

In S363, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing the winning character history. Here, in the present embodiment, in the RUSH mode, when "running battle reach hit" or "special character battle reach hit" is determined as the variation pattern and the state shifts to the jackpot game state, the battle that appeared in that battle reach A character is stored in the work RAM 73 as a winning character history. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of clearing (initializing) the winning character history to 0 based on the fact that the player has not performed a handover selection operation. As a result, for example, the player can newly accumulate his or her winning character history in the RUSH mode. When this process is finished, the process moves to S364.

In S364, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing the obtained music history. Here, in the present embodiment, when a fighting character that has appeared in the Battle Reach described above is stored in the work RAM 73 as a history of the victorious characters, the player can newly select a song corresponding to the fighting character. , this selectable music piece is stored in the work RAM 73 as an acquired music piece history. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of clearing (initializing) the acquired music history to 0 based on the fact that the player has not performed a handover selection operation. Thereby, for example, the player can newly accumulate his/her obtained music history in the RUSH mode. If this process has ended, the process moves to S365.

In S365, the sub CPU 71 refers to the RUSH mode scenario determination table shown in FIG. 21, and performs processing for determining the scenario during the RUSH mode. That is, in the present embodiment, when the winning character history (acquired music history) is not handed over without performing the handover selection operation, the RUSH mode scenario (in the order of determination of the fighting character) is not handed over in conjunction with it. , a new scenario in the RUSH mode (in order of determination of opponent characters). When this process is finished, this pressing operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S366, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the history of the winning character. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring (taking over) the winning character history based on the player's handover selection operation. As a result, for example, the player can take over his own or another player's winning character history accumulated in the previous RUSH mode to play the game in the current RUSH mode. If this process has ended, the process moves to S367.

In S367, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the acquired music history. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring (taking over) this acquired music history based on the player's handover selection operation. As a result, for example, the player can take over his own or other player's acquired music history accumulated in the previous RUSH mode and play the game in the current RUSH mode. If this process has ended, the process moves to S368.

In S368, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for returning to the previous RUSH mode scenario. That is, in the present embodiment, when the handover selection operation is performed and the winning character history (acquired music history) is handed over, the RUSH mode scenario (in the order in which the fighting characters are determined) is also handed over in conjunction with it. configured to When this process is finished, this pressing operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S369, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not it is time to start winning during the RUSH mode. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is time to start the big-hit game state based on the result of the big-hit determination result in the time-saving game state. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is time to start winning during the RUSH mode, the process proceeds to S370. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not the time to start winning during the RUSH mode, the process proceeds to S377.

At S370, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an acquired song. That is, the sub CPU 71 refers to the obtained music history and performs processing to determine whether or not music other than the predetermined music (music defined as the default) can be selected. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there is an acquired song, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S371. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no acquired music, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S374.

In S371, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of displaying a music selection operation screen for acquired music. Details of this music selection operation screen will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the process moves to S372. After the music selection operation screen is displayed once in this process, if it is determined in the process of S370 again that there is an acquired music, the process proceeds to S372 without performing this process again. good too.

In S372, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the player has performed a music selection operation. For example, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a song has been selected by rotating the jog dial 9B and determined by pressing the push button 9A. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the music selection operation has been performed, the process proceeds to S375. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no music selection operation, the process proceeds to S373.

In S373, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the music selection operation valid time has passed. Here, the song selection operation valid time is a time predetermined as a time during which the song selection operation can be performed, and can be set to "10000 ms", for example. It should be noted that the music selection operation may be enabled during the winning start interval time. In this case, any time equal to or less than the win start interval time may be set as the song selection operation valid time. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the song selection operation effective time has passed, the process proceeds to S374. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the music selection operation valid time has not passed, it ends this depression operation button operation determination processing routine.

In S374, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting default music. When this process is finished, this pressing operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S375, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the selected music. When this process is finished, this pressing operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S376, the sub CPU 71 sets the "successful operation-linked effect" effect data, and performs a process of shifting to super reach C. The "successful operation-linked effect" effect data is a case where the variation pattern is a successful operation-linked effect, the final stage (for example, the 11th stage) is a stage other than the conditional stage transition period, and the pressing operation button 9A is When it is determined that there is a stage transition by operation, or when the last stage (for example, the 11th stage) is a conditional stage transition period and the pressing operation button 9A is operated after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed, This is the effect data for performing the effect indicating that the operation-linked effect is successful and the variation effect develops into Super Reach C. When this process is finished, this pressing operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

In S377, the sub CPU 71 executes other pressing operation button operation determination processing. In this process, for example, the sub CPU 71 performs a process corresponding to a login/logout operation for authenticating a player or an effect linked to a pressing operation on another pressing operation button. Then, a process for changing the contents of the production is performed. When this process is finished, this pressing operation button operation determination process routine is finished.

[Command analysis processing]
47 and 48 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. FIG. This command analysis process is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 47, in S390, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has been received, the process proceeds to S391. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, it ends this command analysis processing routine.

In S391, the sub CPU 71 reads out the data of the received command, and performs processing according to the data of the command in subsequent steps. The sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S392 when the reading of the data of the received command is completed.

At S392, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it has received a variation pattern designation command as the command read at S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received a variation pattern designation command as the read command, it shifts the process to S393. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the variation pattern designation command as the read command, it shifts the process to S394.

At S393, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the production pattern including the variable display mode of the decorative symbols based on the received variation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73 when determining the effect pattern including the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. This effect pattern determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

The effect pattern may be determined based on the received variation pattern designation command as described above, or may be determined based on the received start winning command. Also, each information included in these commands may be integrated.

At S394, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it has received a design designation command as the command read at S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the design designation command as the read command, it shifts the processing to S395. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the design designation command as the read command, it shifts the processing to S396.

At S395, the sub CPU 71 performs stop symbol determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61 . When the stop decorative design is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decorative design data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73 . When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

The decorative patterns displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers "1" to "7." )) are aligned with the same decorative pattern (number) (in the case of a specific display mode), the state is shifted to the jackpot game state. In addition, the decorative patterns corresponding to the lost are other loose stitches, but among them, a specific number (for example, two) are stopped and displayed with the same decorative pattern (number) (become a reach), and the rest (for example, 1 ) are stopped and displayed with different decorative patterns (numbers) are called reach-missing eyes. However, even if it is a barakeme, when a specific barakeme suggesting a specific meaning (for example, "753" meaning Shichi-Go-San) is stopped and displayed, the transition to the jackpot game state may be made. .

At S396, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a symbol stop command has been received as the command read at S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the symbol stop command as the read command, it shifts the processing to S397. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S398.

In S397, the sub CPU 71 performs decorative symbol stop processing for stopping and displaying the decorative symbols that are displayed in a variable manner. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

At S398, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a winning start display command has been received as the command read at S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the win start display command as the read command, it shifts the process to S399. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the win start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S401.

At S399, the sub CPU 71 executes a winning effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the content of the effect to be performed in the big win game state based on the type of the big win and the effect mode included in the win start display command received from the main CPU 61 . When this process is finished, the process moves to S400.

In S400, the sub CPU 71 executes a win start process. This win start process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S401, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a large winning opening winning command has been received as the command read out in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the big winning opening winning command as the read command, it shifts the processing to S402. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the big winning opening winning command as the read command, it shifts the processing to S403.

In S402, the sub CPU 71 executes prize ball counter addition processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the jackpot game state (or, in the case of the RUSH mode, In addition to counting the number of prize balls in all jackpot game states shifted to during the RUSH mode, processing for displaying the counted number of prize balls is performed. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S403, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a specific area passing command has been received as the command read out in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the specific area pass command as the read command, it shifts the process to S404. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passing command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S405.

In S404, the sub CPU 71 executes V winning processing. This V winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S405, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the inter-round display command has been received as the command read out in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S407.

In S406, the sub CPU 71 executes inter-round effect processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 performs processing such as setting effect data according to the inter-round interval display time, for example. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S407, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the command read out in S391 has received the display command during opening of the big winning opening. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the display command during opening of the big winning opening as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S408. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it has not received the display command during opening of the big winning opening as the read command, it shifts the processing to S409 (see FIG. 48).

In S408, the sub CPU 71 executes a mid-round effect process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for displaying the remaining number of possible wins in the round and the opening time of the big win opening. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

As shown in FIG. 48, at S409, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a winning completion display command has been received as the command read at S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the win end display command as the read command, it shifts the process to S410. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the winning end display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S411.

At S410, the sub CPU 71 executes a winning end effect process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the content of the effect to be performed at the end of the big win game state based on the kind of the big win included in the win end display command received from the main CPU 61 . When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

At S411, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a gaming state command has been received as the command read at S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received a game state command as the read command, it shifts the process to S412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S413.

In S412, the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode change processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the production mode flag to "03H" if the received gaming state command is a command indicating the probability variable/time-saving gaming state, and sets the value of the production mode flag to "03H", If there is, "01H" is set to the value of the performance mode flag, and the RUSH mode is set as the performance mode. Further, if the received gaming state command is a command indicating a probability variable/non-time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the production mode flag to "02H" and sets the special mode as the production mode. Also, if the received gaming state command is a command indicating a non-probability variable/non-time-saving gaming state, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the production mode flag to "00H" and sets the normal mode as the production mode. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S413, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a time saving end command has been received as the command read out in S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S414. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S415.

In S414, the sub CPU 71 executes time saving mode end processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 updates the value of the production mode flag from "01H" to "00H", and updates the production mode from the RUSH mode to the normal mode. In addition, the sub CPU 71 performs processing such as setting a special effect content determination table (not shown) that facilitates the selection of a relatively highly expected effect pattern in a predetermined number of games after the end of the time saving mode, for example. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

At S415, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a variable probability end command has been received as the command read at S391. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the variable probability end command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S416. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the variable probability end command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S417.

In S416, the sub CPU 71 executes ST mode end processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 updates the value of the production mode flag from "02H" to "00H" and updates the production mode from the special mode to the normal mode. In addition, when updating the value of the production mode flag from "03H" to "01H", the production mode is not updated. In addition, the sub CPU 71 performs processing such as setting a special effect content determination table (not shown) that facilitates the selection of a relatively expected effect pattern in a predetermined number of games after the end of the special mode, for example. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S417, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not an ejection error command has been received as the command read out in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received an ejection error command as the read command, it shifts the process to S418. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the ejection error command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S419.

In S418, the sub CPU 71 executes ejection error notification processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for notifying that an error has occurred in the second big winning hole 37 . When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

In S419, the sub CPU 71 also executes processing corresponding to the received command. When this processing ends, the command analysis processing routine ends.

[Production pattern determination process]
FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing effect pattern determination processing executed by the sub CPU 71 . This effect pattern determination process is a process for determining a effect pattern as the effect content, and is executed in units of the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 49, in S430, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "01H" or "03H". The production mode flag is an internal flag indicating the type of production mode. In this embodiment, the production mode flag has a value corresponding to the normal mode "00H", a value corresponding to the RUSH mode as a non-probability variable / time saving game state "01H", and a value corresponding to the special mode "02H" , The value corresponding to the RUSH mode as a variable probability/time saving gaming state is "03H". It is possible to change the background image and the content of the effect according to the value of the effect mode flag. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the production mode is the RUSH mode. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is "01H" or "03H", the process proceeds to S431. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "01H" or "03H", the process proceeds to S433.

In S431, the sub CPU 71 executes processing during the RUSH mode. This in-RUSH mode process will be described later using FIG. If this process has ended, the process moves to S432.

In S432, the sub CPU 71 executes an item effect process during RUSH mode. This RUSH mode item rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process has ended, the process moves to S436.

In S433, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "02H". That is, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the effect mode is the special mode. When it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "02H", the process proceeds to S434. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "02H", the process proceeds to S435.

In S434, the sub CPU 71 executes special mode processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a special mode mid-use sub effect content determination table (not shown), and determines the result of the big hit determination (win or lose), the type of the variation pattern designation command, and the random number range for sub effect selection (lottery value). and the like, the process of determining the effect pattern is performed. If this process has ended, the process moves to S436. In this special mode process, the same process as the normal mode process described later may be performed.

In S435, the sub CPU 71 executes normal mode processing. This normal mode process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process has ended, the process moves to S436.

In S436, the sub CPU 71 executes a pending display mode change effect process. This pending display mode change effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process has ended, the process moves to S437.

In S437, the sub CPU 71 executes a process of setting effect data corresponding to the determined type of effect pattern. When this processing ends, the effect pattern determination processing routine ends.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the pending display mode change effect when receiving the variation pattern designation command, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in S115 of the first starting opening switch check process shown in FIG. 28 or S125 of the second starting opening switch check process shown in FIG. is determined, the pending display mode change effect may be executed. That is, the main CPU 61 side may control whether or not to execute the pending display mode change effect. In this case, the variation pattern designation command or the start winning command may include information about whether or not the main CPU 61 can perform the "prefetch effect", or the sub CPU 71 may receive the received variation pattern designation command or start winning command. It is also possible to hold information about whether or not the "read-ahead effect" included in is held, and to determine the effect content of the pending display mode change effect by referring to the held information as well.

In addition, the main CPU 61 side determines the effect content of the pending display mode change effect (for example, the prefetch pending change pattern shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 and the variable pending change pattern shown in FIGS. 15 and 16). good too. In this case, a variation pattern is determined for each effect content of the pending display mode change effect, and the sub CPU 71 executes the pending display mode change effect based on the contents of the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern or the start winning command. Alternatively, when a specific variation pattern is selected, the content of the pending display mode change effect is separately determined, and a variation pattern specification command including information on the determined content of the effect, or a start winning By transmitting the command, the sub CPU 71 may perform the pending display mode change effect. That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute the pending display mode change effect, and determines the content of the effect of the pending display mode change effect. The sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the pending display mode change effect, and the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the pending display mode change effect. Any aspect of the aspect of determining the effect content of the change effect shall be included.

Also, regardless of whether the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71 decides, whether or not to execute the pending display mode change effect, and the content of the pending display mode change effect when the pending display mode change effect is executed. may be determined by different lotteries, or may be simultaneously determined by a collective lottery. That is, whether or not to execute the pending display mode change effect and the content of the pending display mode change effect when the pending display mode change effect is executed may be determined by a plurality of processes, and may be determined by one process. It may be decided.

[Processing during RUSH mode]
FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing processing during the RUSH mode executed by the sub CPU 71. As shown in FIG. This processing during the RUSH mode is processing for determining the content of the effect in the RUSH mode, and is executed in units of the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 50, in S440, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating (adding) the value of the RUSH mode management counter. The RUSH mode management counter is a counter for counting the number of games played in the RUSH mode, that is, in the time-saving gaming state. . When this process is completed, the process proceeds to S441.

In S441, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the RUSH mode management counter is 88 or more. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the transformation effect section of the RUSH mode. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the RUSH mode management counter is 88 or more, the process proceeds to S442. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the RUSH mode management counter is not 88 or more (that is, it is a RUSH mode battle effect section), the process proceeds to S443.

At S442, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data corresponding to the variation pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub-effect content determination table for mid-RUSH mode (not shown), and determines the result of the big hit determination (hit-or-lose), the type of variation pattern designation command, and the random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value). and the like, the process of determining the effect pattern is performed. When this processing ends, the RUSH mode processing routine ends.

In S443, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not "14H" or "17H" has been determined as the variation pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the variation pattern is to perform the “running battle ready-to-win” effect. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "14H" or "17H" is determined as the variation pattern, the process proceeds to S444. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "14H" or "17H" has not been determined as the variation pattern, the process proceeds to S451.

In S444, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not all battle characters have been defeated. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a history of winning against all of characters 1 to 12 is stored as a history of the characters that have won. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that all the opponent characters have been defeated, the process proceeds to S445. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that all of the opponent characters have not been defeated, the process proceeds to S446.

In S445, the sub CPU 71 determines a fighting character by lottery, and performs processing of setting effect data according to the determined fighting character and the variation pattern. In this process, for example, when the opponent character determined by lottery is Character 1 and the variation pattern is "14H", the sub CPU 71 performs a "race race" in which Character 1 and the main character race and the main character loses. If the variation pattern is "17H", character 1 and the main character race against each other and the main character wins. process. When this processing ends, the RUSH mode processing routine ends.

In the process of S444, if the sub CPU 71 determines that all the fighting characters have been defeated and the variation pattern is "17H", the final stage of the series of story effects (ending effect) is set, and effect data for performing the ending effect is set in the winning effect pattern determination process (see S399 in FIG. may be given a privilege of having already won. In addition, when the effect at the introduction of the ending effect and the ending effect are performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the history of the victorious character is cleared to 0 again (initialized), and the history of the victorious character is newly set. You may enable it to accumulate|storage. However, in this case, the acquired music history is not cleared to 0 (initialized), and all music can be left selectable. Further, when the sub CPU 71 determines in the process of S444 that all the characters have been defeated, the process of S445 remains as it is, and in the winning effect pattern determination process (see S399 in FIG. 47), Effect data for performing an ending effect is set, and when this ending effect is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) (that is, when the jackpot game state continues in the RUSH mode), the winning character is played again. The history may be cleared to 0 (initialized).

In S446, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not to select a fighting character according to the order of determination of the determined scenario. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines, for example, to select a fighting character in accordance with the scenario determination order determined with a probability of 80/100, and regardless of the scenario determination order determined with a probability of 20/100. It is decided to select one fighting character by lottery. If this process has ended, the process moves to S447.

In S447, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining the opponent character in accordance with the determination result of S446, in the order of determination of the scenarios that have been determined or by lottery. In this process, for example, when Scenario 1 is determined as the RUSH mode scenario and it is determined to select a fighting character in accordance with the determined order of the determined scenario, the sub CPU 71 If the character 2 has not already been won, the character 2 whose order of determination of the fighting character is "1" is determined as the fighting character. On the other hand, if it is decided to select one fighting character by lottery regardless of the determined order of scenario determination, one fighting character is determined by lottery from characters 1 to 12.例文帳に追加If this process has ended, the process moves to S448.

In S448, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not "14H" has been determined as the variation pattern and a winning character has been determined as the fighting character. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that "14H" has been determined as the variation pattern and a winning character has been determined as the fighting character, the process proceeds to S449. On the other hand, if it is determined that "14H" has not been determined as the variation pattern, or that a winning character has not been determined as the fighting character, the process proceeds to S450.

In S449, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of changing the opponent character in accordance with the determined order of determination of the opponent character in the RUSH mode scenario. In the present embodiment, when a winning character appears as a fighting character in the “race battle ready-to-win” effect, it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination is a win in principle. Therefore, if the result of the jackpot determination is not a win and a winning character is determined as the fighting character, the sub CPU 71 changes the fighting character to another character that has not won in this process. ing. Specifically, for example, if Scenario 1 is determined as the RUSH mode scenario, and character 2, whose order of determination of the fighting character is "1", has already been defeated, the fighting character determined in S447 is character 2. If so, the fighting character is changed to character 11 whose fighting character determination order is "2". When this process is finished, the process moves to S450.

When changing the battle character in the process of S449, the sub CPU 71 selects characters with a lower (higher order) value of the battle character determination order in the RUSH mode scenario that has been determined, and has not won. The character is changed as a fighting character (that is, starting from "1" in the battle character determination order, characters that have not been defeated are sequentially searched according to the battle character determination order in the RUSH mode scenario that has been determined from there. , the opponent character is changed according to the search results), but it is not limited to this. For example, the fighting character determination order corresponding to the characters determined as the fighting characters before the change may be used as a starting point, and characters that have not been defeated may be sequentially searched from there to change the fighting character. Also, for example, without considering the order of determination of fighting characters, the search order is determined in advance for characters 1 to 12, and characters that have not been defeated are sequentially searched according to this search order to change the fighting character. good too. In this case, for example, the search order may be determined such that "character 12" is the starting point and "character 1" is the ending point. It is also possible to sequentially retrieve characters that have not been defeated from any other starting point and change the fighting character.

At S450, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data corresponding to the determined battle character and variation pattern. When this processing ends, the RUSH mode processing routine ends.

In S451, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data according to the variation pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to a sub-effect content determination table for mid-RUSH mode (not shown), and determines the result of the big hit determination (hit-or-lose), the type of variation pattern designation command, and the random number range for sub-effect selection (lottery value). and the like, the process of determining the effect pattern is performed. When this processing ends, the RUSH mode processing routine ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in a specific effect state (eg, RUSH mode), when it is determined to give an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state), a specific effect display (eg, " In the case where the "Kakekko Battle Reach" effect is performed, the characters appearing in the specific effect display (for example, the fighting character) are stored as the victorious characters, and the music corresponding to the victorious character is the acquired music. It is configured to be newly selectable. Further, in a specific effect state, when it is not decided to give an advantageous state, and when the specific effect display is performed, the appearing character stored as the victorious character is not determined. ing. That is, when an appearing character stored as a victorious character appears when a specific effect display is performed in a specific effect state, provision of an advantageous state is determined.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the number of songs that can be selected increases, it is possible to provide an added value of changing the degree of expectation for a big hit when a specific performance display is performed in a specific performance state, which is an added value of interest. can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the order of determination of characters that appear in a specific effect state (for example, a scenario in RUSH mode) is determined, and when a specific effect display is performed, the characters that appear are determined in accordance with the order of determination. In some cases, the characters appearing are determined by lottery. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when it is not determined to impart an advantageous state, and when a specific effect display is performed, an appearing character that is not stored as a victorious character is determined according to the determination order. is configured as That is, when a specific performance display is performed in a specific performance state, the appearing character can be intentionally or unintentionally determined within a range in which there is no discrepancy in the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to ensure the randomness of appearing characters when a specific effect display is performed in a specific effect state, and to match the degree of expectation for a big hit, thereby improving the interest. .

[Item effect processing during RUSH mode]
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing item effect processing during RUSH mode executed by the sub CPU 71 . This RUSH mode item effect process is a process for controlling the item effect in the RUSH mode, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 51, in S460, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the value of the RUSH mode management counter is 1 or not. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not it is time to start the RUSH mode. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the RUSH mode management counter is 1, the process proceeds to S461. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the RUSH mode management counter is not 1, the process proceeds to S462.

In S461, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining initial items by lottery. In this embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 61, an item display area 800 (item area) capable of displaying a plurality of items is provided in the display area 4A during the RUSH mode. The item display area 800 includes a first item display area 801 that displays the first item, a second item display area 802 that displays the second item, and a third item display area 803 that displays the third item. , and a fourth item display area 804 for displaying the fourth item. It is possible to perform an effect display according to the display mode. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a lottery process for determining the type of item to be displayed in the first item display area 801 . The types of items displayed in the first item display area 801 to the fourth item display area 804 will be described later. If this process has ended, the process moves to S470.

In S462, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the item prefetch pattern is being executed. The item prefetch pattern is an effect pattern for determining the type of item by "prefetch effect". In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the item prefetch pattern is being executed, the process proceeds to S465. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the item prefetch pattern is not being executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S463.

In S463, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute the item prefetch pattern based on the number of pending, presence/absence of winning in the pending, type of winning, and current item. In this process, the sub CPU 71, for example, the number of reservations is "4", there is a hit in the reservation, and the type of the hit in the reservation is the second special symbol "jack 6" or "jack 7" (time saving middle hit 12R-1 or short time middle hit 12R-2), and when "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 as the current item, the first item display area with a predetermined probability It is determined to execute an item prefetch pattern in which four "items 1" are displayed in the second item display area 801 to 804 (four "items 1" are aligned).

Also, for example, the number of reservations is "4", there is a hit in the reservation, the type of the hit in this reservation is the second special symbol "jackpot 8" (8R during the time saving), and as the current item , when "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801, three "items 1" are displayed in the first item display area 801 to the second item display area 804 with a predetermined probability. It decides to run the item lookahead pattern (three of "item 1").

Also, for example, the number of reservations is "4", there is a hit in the reservation, the type of the hit in this reservation is the second special pattern "jackpot 9" (4R during the time saving), and as the current item , When "Item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801, two "Item 1" are displayed in the first item display area 801 to the second item display area 804 with a predetermined probability. It decides to run the item lookahead pattern (which has two copies of "item 1"). If this process has ended, the process proceeds to S464.

That is, in this embodiment, when a hit is included in the hold, the number of items displayed in the item area varies according to the number of rounds in the big win game state that is shifted by the hit. Therefore, if two items are aligned in the item area and the state shifts to the jackpot game state, the number of rounds is 4R, and there is a high possibility that the number of game media that can be obtained is the smallest. If the game state is shifted to a jackpot game state with 3 items aligned, the number of rounds is 8R, the number of game media that can be obtained is likely to be medium, and 4 items are aligned in the item area. In the case of transitioning to the jackpot game state in the state where the game is being played, the number of rounds is 12R, and there is a high possibility that the number of game media that can be obtained is the largest. In this way, in the present embodiment, it is possible to notify not only the degree of expectation of a big win, but also information on the amount of game media that can be acquired when the game state shifts to a big win (expected number of game media to be acquired). and

However, in the above example, even if the type of hit in the hold is the second special symbol "jackpot 9" (shorter time hit 4R), the item prefetch pattern in which three items are aligned is determined. Alternatively, an item prefetch pattern in which four items are aligned may be determined. Also, when the type of hit in the reserve is the second special symbol "jackpot 8" (shorter time hit 8R), an item prefetch pattern in which two items are aligned may be determined. , an item prefetch pattern in which four items are arranged may be determined. Also, when the type of hit in the reserve is the second special pattern "jackpot 6" or "jackpot 7" (time-saving medium hit 12R-1 or time-saving medium hit 12R-2), two items are complete. An item prefetch pattern may be determined, or an item prefetch pattern in which three items are aligned may be determined. In other words, when the number of items in the set is large, the expected number of game media to be obtained is relatively high, and when the number of items in the set is small, the expected number of game media to be obtained is relatively low. good.

In S464, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the determination result of S463 determines execution of the item prefetch pattern. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that execution of the item prefetch pattern is to be determined, the process proceeds to S465. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that execution of the item prefetch pattern is not determined, the process proceeds to S466.

In S465, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an item according to the item prefetch pattern. In this process, for example, when an item prefetch pattern in which two items are arranged is determined, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining the same item as the item displayed in the first item display area 801. I do. If this process has ended, the process moves to S470.

In S466, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining an item by lottery based on the number of reservations, whether or not there is a winning in the reservation, the type of winning, and the current item. In this process, the sub CPU 71, for example, when the number of reservations is "4", there is a hit in the reservation, and "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 as the current item, , determine “item 1” with a relatively high probability (that is, make it easier for two or more “items 1” to be matched). On the other hand, if the number of pending items is "4", there are no hits in the pending items, and "Item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 as the current item, there is a relatively high probability that " Items other than item 1” are determined (that is, it is difficult for “item 1” to be more than two).

Also, for example, the number of reservations is "4", there is a hit in the reservation, and the type of the hit in the reservation is the second special pattern "jackpot 6" to "jackpot 8" (short time hit 12R-1, Time saving middle hit 12R-2 or time saving middle hit 8R), "Item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801, and "Item 1" is displayed in the second item display area 802 as the current item. If it is, "item 1" is determined with a relatively high probability (that is, "item 1" is likely to be three or more). On the other hand, the number of reservations is "4", there is no hit in the reservation, or there is a hit in the reservation, and the type of the hit in this reservation is the second special pattern "jackpot 9" (time-saving medium hit 4R ), and if "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801 and "item 1" is displayed in the second item display area 802 as the current item, there is a relatively high probability that Determine items other than "item 1" (that is, make it difficult for "item 1" to be more than three).

Also, for example, the number of reservations is "4", there is a hit in the reservation, and the type of the hit in the reservation is the second special symbol "jack 6" or "jack 7" (short time hit 12R-1 or 12R-2), "Item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801, "Item 1" is displayed in the second item display area 802, and "Item 1" is displayed in the third item display area as the current item. When "item 1" is displayed in 803, "item 1" is determined with a relatively high probability (ie, four or more "items 1" are likely to be arranged). On the other hand, the number of reservations is "4", there is no winning in the reservation, or there is a winning in the reservation, and the kind of winning in this reservation is the second special symbol "big win 8" or "big win 9". (Time saving medium hit 8R or time saving medium hit 4R), and as the current item, "item 1" is displayed in the first item display area 801, "item 1" is displayed in the second item display area 802, and the second item is displayed. When "item 1" is displayed in the 3-item display area 803, an item other than "item 1" is determined with a relatively high probability (that is, it is difficult for "item 1" to be more than four). ). If this process has ended, the process moves to S467.

In S467, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a "rainbow" in the pending display mode. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a big hit has been confirmed or a display mode (rainbow) with an extremely high degree of expectation for a big hit has been determined as the content of the prefetch pending change effect or the content of the variable pending change effect. . In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the pending display mode includes "rainbow", the process proceeds to S468. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no "rainbow" in the pending display mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S470.

In S468, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the items determined by the process of S465 or the process of S466 are equal to or more than three items. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the determined items are three or more items, the process proceeds to S469. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the determined items do not include three or more items, the process proceeds to S470. In addition, in this process, it may be determined whether or not the determined items are equal to or more than two items, or whether or not the determined items are equal to or more than four items. You may do so.

In S469, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of redetermining items by lottery from items in a group different from the determined item group. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of changing the items so that there are no more than three items (or two or four items) when the reserved display mode is "rainbow". At this time, the item to be re-determined is determined from a group different from the group of items displayed in the first item display area 801 . Groups of items will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process has ended, the process moves to S470.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a specific display mode (for example, display mode (rainbow)) with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed as the pending display mode, a predetermined number (for example, 3 One) or more items are controlled so that they do not line up. That is, when it is reported that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, the number of game media expected to be acquired is not reported.

In S470, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the item area display according to the item determined by the process of S465, the process of S466, or the process of S469. In this process, for example, when the item determined this time is "item 1", the sub CPU 71 displays this "item 1" in the first item display area 801, and until then, the first item display area 801 is displayed. , the item displayed in the second item display area 802 is shifted to the second item display area 802, and the item displayed in the second item display area 802 is shifted to the third item display area 803 and displayed. The items displayed in the third item display area 803 are shifted and displayed in the fourth item display area 804, and the items displayed in the fourth item display area 804 until then are cleared. When this process is finished, the process moves to S471.

In S471, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether three or more items are displayed in the item display area 800 (item area). In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there are three items or more, the process proceeds to S472. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there are not more than three items, the process proceeds to S473. In this process, it may be determined whether or not there are two or more items, or whether or not there are four or more items.

At S472, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the frame display mode in the item area frame display area should be a special mode, based on the presence or absence of the winning in the reserve and the type of the winning. . In this process, the sub CPU 71 detects, for example, that there is a hit in the reserve, and the type of the hit in the reserve is the second special symbol "jackpot 6" to "jackpot 8" 12R-2 or 8R during time saving), and in the case of three items, with a predetermined probability, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is changed from the frame display mode (white) as a normal mode to a special mode. frame display mode (green).

Also, for example, there is a hit in the reserve, and the type of the hit in the reserve is the second special symbol "jackpot 6" or "jackpot 7" (time-saving medium hit 12R-1 or time-saving medium hit 12R-2). , In the case of four items, there is a certain probability that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area will change from the frame display mode (white) as the normal mode (or the frame display mode (green) as the special mode). It is decided to change to the frame display mode (red) as a special mode. In addition, there is no hit in the reservation, or there is a hit in the reservation, and the type of the hit in this reservation is the second special pattern "jackpot 9" (time-saving middle hit 4R), and three items or more Also in the case of , it may be decided to set the frame display mode in the item area frame display area to the frame display mode (green) or the frame display mode (red) as a special mode with a probability lower than a predetermined probability. . If this process has ended, the process moves to S475.

In S473, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is the special mode. That is, the sub CPU 71 continues to determine whether or not the frame display mode in the item area frame display area remains in the special mode when the number of items is less than three. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is the special mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S474. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is not the special mode, the sub CPU 71 ends the RUSH mode item effect processing routine.

In S474, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the frame display mode in the item area frame display area should be the normal mode, based on the presence or absence of the winning in the pending state and the type of the winning. In this process, the sub CPU 71 changes the frame display mode in the item area frame display area from the frame display mode (green) or the frame display mode (red) as the special mode to the normal It is decided to change to the frame display mode (white) as the mode. Also, for example, if there is a hit in the reserve, and the type of the hit in the reserve is the second special symbol "jackpot 9" (time-saving medium hit 4R), with a predetermined probability, in the item area frame display area It is decided to leave the frame display mode as the special mode.

Also, for example, there is a hit in the hold, and the type of hit in the hold is the second special pattern "jackpot 6" to "jackpot 8" (time-saving hit 12R-1, time-saving hit 12R-2 or time-saving hit 8R), and if the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is the frame display mode (green) as a special mode, it is determined that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area remains the special mode. do.

Also, for example, there is a hit in the hold, and the type of hit in the hold is the second special pattern "jackpot 6" to "jackpot 8" (time-saving hit 12R-1, time-saving hit 12R-2 or time-saving hit 8R), and if the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is the frame display mode (red) as the special mode, it is determined that the frame display mode in the item area frame display area remains the special mode. do. In addition, when the type of hit in the reserve is the second special pattern "jackpot 8" (time-saving middle hit 8R), with a predetermined probability, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area is displayed as the normal mode. You may decide to change to the mode (white). If this process has ended, the process moves to S475.

That is, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, three) or more items are collected in the item effect during the RUSH mode, the display contents of the item area itself (for example, the frame display in the item area frame display area aspect) may also change, and when changed, control is performed so that the degree of expectation for a big hit and the number of game media expected to be acquired also increase.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the item effect during the RUSH mode, even if the display contents of the item area itself are not aligned after the display contents of the item area itself have changed, the display contents of the item area itself remains changed, control is continued so that the expected degree of big win and the expected number of game media to be obtained are maintained. As a result, even when the mode of the items displayed in the specific display area no longer satisfies the predetermined degree of expectation, the sense of expectation for the big win is maintained and the amusement of the game is reduced. prevent

In S475, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the frame display mode of the item area according to the determination result of S472 or S474. When this process ends, the item effect process routine during RUSH mode ends.

Thus, in this embodiment, the first information displayed in the first information display means (for example, the first reserved ball display area 701, the second reserved ball display area 702, the variable reserved ball display area 703) ( For example, the degree of expectation of a big hit is notified by the display mode of the ball held), and the acquisition expectation game is performed by the display mode of the second information (for example, the item) displayed by the second information display means (for example, the item display area 800). It is configured to be able to notify the number of media. That is, by combining these pieces of information, it is possible to guess which specific game state (eg, jackpot game state) the degree of expectation for shifting to is high. By constructing in this way, it is possible to give a big hit notice that further heightens the expectation of the player, and to notify more diverse information in a novel manner.

Further, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the first information is a specific display mode (for example, a display mode (rainbow)) with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the second information display means displays the same display mode. 2 information is not displayed continuously for a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. By constructing in this way, for example, even though it is reported that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, it is reported that the number of game media expected to be acquired is low, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. can be done. Also, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by a more complicated notification despite the fact that the degree of expectation for the big win is high.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition (for example, three items or more) is satisfied for the second information displayed on the second information display means, the display of the second information display means itself is further performed. The content (for example, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area) may also change, and when it changes, the expected jackpot degree and/or the expected number of game media to be acquired are configured to change. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the contents of information to be notified by the second information display means and to enhance the interest of the game.

[Processing in normal mode]
FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing normal mode processing executed by the sub CPU 71 . This normal mode process is a process for determining the content of the effect in the normal mode, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 52, in S480, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not "04H", "08H" or "12H" is determined as the variation pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the variation pattern is to perform an operation-linked effect. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "04H", "08H" or "12H" is determined as the variation pattern, the process proceeds to S481. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "04H", "08H" or "12H" has not been determined as the variation pattern, the process proceeds to S482.

In S481, the sub CPU 71 refers to the operation-linked effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, and based on the type of the variation pattern designation command and the sub-effect selection random number range (lottery value), the operation-linked effect scenario is determined. A process for determining (operation-linked production scenario) is performed. When this process ends, the normal mode process routine ends.

In S482, the sub CPU 71 refers to a normal mode mid-mode sub effect determination table (not shown), and determines the result of the big hit determination (hit or lose), the type of the variation pattern designation command, the random number range for sub effect selection (lottery value), and the like. Based on and, the process of determining the production pattern is performed. When this process ends, the normal mode process routine ends.

[Holding display mode change effect processing]
FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing a pending display mode change effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. As shown in FIG. This pending display mode change effect processing is a process for controlling the look-ahead pending change effect and the variable pending change effect, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 53, in S490, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the prefetching suspension change pattern is being executed. The prefetching pending change pattern is an effect pattern for executing an effect (prefetching pending display mode changing effect) of changing the pending display mode by the "prefetching effect", an example of which is shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the prefetching pending change pattern is being executed, the process proceeds to S494. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the prefetch pending change pattern is not being executed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S491.

In S491, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not to execute the prefetching suspension display mode change effect for the target change. The target change indicates the pending ball (starting memory) that is the target of the prefetch pending display mode change effect. On the other hand, the variation indicates the reserved ball (starting memory) used in the special symbol game (the game) of this time. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute the "read-ahead effect" by changing the pending display mode. It should be noted that, as described above, the main CPU 61 may determine whether or not to execute the "prefetch effect" by changing the pending display mode. If this process has ended, the process moves to S492.

In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of determination in S491 is to execute the prefetching suspension display mode change effect. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the prefetching suspension display mode change effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to S493. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the prefetching suspension display mode change effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to S496.

In S493, the sub CPU 71 refers to the prefetch pending change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. ), the process of determining the prefetch pending change pattern is performed. Various parameters for determining the prefetch pending change pattern can be appropriately set. For example, in this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the prefetch pending change pattern based on the winning lottery result and the number of pending Alternatively, the prefetch hold change pattern may be determined based on the winning lottery result or the number of holds. If this process has ended, the process moves to S494.

In S494, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the start of fluctuation of the prefetch target fluctuation. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the reserved ball (starting memory) targeted for the prefetch reserved display mode change effect is used in the current special symbol game (the relevant game). In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the prefetch target change has started, the process proceeds to S496. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the fluctuation of the prefetch target fluctuation has not started, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S495.

In S495, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the pending display mode according to the prefetch pending change pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71 is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage area (4), for example, when the "prefetch pending change pattern 405" is determined. The display mode of the held ball corresponding to the start memory (hold 4) is displayed as the display mode (white), and then the start memory is the first special symbol start storage area (3) or the second special symbol start storage area ( 3) is shifted and stored, the display mode of the held ball corresponding to the start memory (hold 3) is displayed as the display mode (blue), and then the start memory is the first special symbol start memory. As it is shifted and stored in the area (2) or the second special symbol start memory area (2), the display mode of the hold ball corresponding to the start memory (hold 2) is displayed as the display mode (yellow). After that, as the starting memory is shifted to the first special symbol starting memory area (1) or the second special symbol starting memory area (1) and stored, the holding corresponding to the starting memory (holding 1) The display mode of the sphere is displayed as the display mode (green). When this process ends, the pending display mode change effect process routine ends.

In S496, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the pending display mode of the change is the display mode (rainbow). In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the pending display mode of the change is the display mode (rainbow), the sub CPU 71 ends the pending display mode change effect processing routine. In the present embodiment, since the display mode (rainbow) has the highest expectation of a big hit as a pending display mode, when the pending display mode of the variation is the display mode (rainbow), the variation described later No determination of pending change patterns shall be made. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the pending display mode of the change is not the display mode (rainbow), the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S497 in order to determine the change pending change pattern described later.

In S497, the sub CPU 71 refers to the variation pending variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, and the winning lottery result, the pseudo number of runs, and the variation pattern associated with the variation (see FIG. 12). Based on and, the process of determining the variation pending change pattern is performed. Various parameters for determining the variable pending change pattern can be set as appropriate. For example, in this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the variable pending change pattern based on the winning lottery result and the pseudo number of runs. Alternatively, the variation pending change pattern may be determined based on the winning lottery result or the pseudo number of runs. If this process has ended, the process moves to S498.

In S498, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for updating the pending display mode according to the variable pending change pattern. In this process, the sub CPU 71, for example, when the "variation pending change pattern 505" is determined, changes the display mode of the pending ball displayed as the display mode (white) at the start of the variation to 1 Displayed as a display mode (blue) during the execution of the second pseudo-run (pseudo-run 1), displayed as a display mode (yellow) during the second pseudo-run (pseudo-run 2), and displayed as a display mode (yellow) during the second pseudo-run. (pseudo-continuation 3), it is displayed in the display mode (green), and when the fourth pseudo-continuation is executed (pseudo-continuation 4), it is displayed in the display mode (red). When this process ends, the pending display mode change effect process routine ends.

In this embodiment, when the target variation becomes the relevant variation during the execution of the prefetch pending change pattern, it is determined whether or not to execute the relevant variation pending change pattern. For example, it may be determined whether or not to execute the variable pending change pattern even during execution of the prefetch pending change pattern. In this case, the prefetch pending change pattern and the variation pending change pattern may be executed in parallel. Further, in this case, when it is determined to execute the variable pending change pattern, the prefetch pending change pattern may be changed according to the decision result, and the prefetch pending change pattern may be: A plurality of branches may be provided in advance in consideration of changes in the pending display mode due to the variable pending change pattern. Also, in this case, regarding the prefetch pending change pattern, the prefetch pending change pattern that allows the pending display mode to be changed by the variable pending change pattern, and the prefetch pending change pattern that is impossible to change the pending display mode by the variable pending change pattern. It is good also as predetermining a reading suspension change pattern.

Thus, in the present embodiment, whether or not to change the display mode of the information (for example, held ball) corresponding to the starting memory information before the variable display of the identification information using the starting memory information starts. It determines whether or not to not only give a big hit notice by changing the display mode according to the determination result, but also to change when the variable display of the identification information using the start storage information starts. , the jackpot announcement is performed by changing the display mode according to the determination result. That is, not only is it determined whether or not to change the display mode of the held ball by the so-called "predictive effect", but it is also determined whether or not to change the display mode of the held ball in the variation. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a big hit notice that further heightens the player's expectation.

Also, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the information corresponding to the starting memory information is changed in the variation, whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) and a specific symbol variation display (for example , and the number of pseudo-runs (for example, the number of pseudo-runs), the content of the change in the display mode is determined. By configuring in this way, for example, even if the display mode of the information corresponding to the start memory information does not change until the change starts, the information corresponding to the start memory information is displayed during the change. Since the aspect may change, the expectation of a big win can be given in all variations. In addition, since the content of the change in the display mode is determined by the number of pseudo-runs, it is possible to make an interesting big hit announcement by the execution of the pseudo-runs and the change in the display mode of the held ball in the variation.

Further, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the information corresponding to the starting memory information is changed in the change, if the display mode is changed before the change starts, the display mode after the change is changed. The content of the change in the display mode is determined based on the display mode and whether or not to shift to the specific game state (for example, the jackpot game state). By configuring in this way, the degree of expectation for a big hit indicated by the display mode of the information corresponding to the starting memory information that changed before the variation started is inherited in the variation, and furthermore, the display mode changes in the variation. Since the degree of expectation for a big hit indicated by the display mode may increase, it is interesting to link the change in the display mode of the held ball due to the so-called "predictive effect" and the change in the display mode of the held ball due to the fluctuation. A high jackpot notice can be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the information corresponding to the starting memory information that changed before the change started is a specific display mode (for example, a display mode (rainbow)) with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. In this case, the display mode is configured not to change in the variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by a more complicated notification despite the fact that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, and to prevent the player from being confused. Control burden can be reduced.

[Processing at start of winning]
FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the winning start process executed by the sub CPU 71 . This winning start process is a process for updating the above-described winning character history and acquired music history, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 54, in S500, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not it is time to start winning during the RUSH mode. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is time to start winning during the RUSH mode, the process proceeds to S501. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not the time to start winning during the RUSH mode, the sub CPU 71 ends the processing routine at the start of winning.

In S501, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not "17H" has been determined as the variation pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the variation pattern is to perform a “race battle ready-to-win” effect. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "17H" has been determined as the variation pattern, the process proceeds to S502. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "17H" has not been determined as the variation pattern, the process proceeds to S505.

In S502, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the opponent character is a victorious character. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the opponent character that appeared in the current "race battle ready-win" effect was a character stored in the victorious character history. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the opponent character is a winning character, the sub CPU 71 ends the win start process routine. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the opponent character is not a victorious character, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S503.

In S503, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the battle character to a victorious character. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the opponent character that has appeared in the current "race battle ready-win" effect as having been won in the history of winning characters. If this process has ended, the process moves to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the music corresponding to the fighting character to the acquired music. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing, in the acquired music history, the music corresponding to the battle character that appeared in the current "race battle ready-win" production as having been acquired. If this process has ended, the process moves to S509.

In S505, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not "18H" has been determined as the variation pattern. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the variation pattern is to perform a "special character battle ready-to-win" effect. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that "18H" has been determined as the variation pattern, the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that "18H" has not been determined as the variation pattern, it ends the winning start processing routine.

In S506, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not character 1 is a victorious character. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the character 1 that appeared in the current "special character battle ready-to-win" effect was a character stored in the victorious character history. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the character 1 is a winning character, the sub CPU 71 ends the winning start process routine. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the character 1 is not a victorious character, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S507.

In S507, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating character 1 to a victorious character. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the character 1 that appeared in the current "special character battle ready-win" effect as having won in the history of the won characters. If this process has ended, the process moves to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the music corresponding to Character 1 to the acquired music. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the music corresponding to the character 1 that appeared in the current "special character battle reach win" effect as having been acquired in the acquired music history. If this process has ended, the process moves to S509.

In S509, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not all characters have been defeated. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not all of the characters 1 to 12 are stored as having won in the character history of having won. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that all characters have been defeated, the process proceeds to S510. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that all the characters have not been defeated, the sub CPU 71 ends the winning start processing routine.

In S510, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the special music to the acquired music. That is, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the special music as acquired in the acquired music history as a special privilege for winning (defeating) all the characters. When this processing ends, the win start processing routine ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), a specific effect display (for example, "race battle A special effect display (for example, a "special character battle reach" effect) for notifying that an advantageous state is given can be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the order of determination of appearing characters (e.g., battle characters) that appear in a specific effect display (e.g., scenario during RUSH mode) is determined, and when a specific effect display is performed, this order is determined. It is configured such that it is further determined whether or not to determine the appearing characters in order of determination. In this embodiment, when a specific effect display is performed, if it is decided to determine the characters that appear in the order of determination, the characters that appear are determined in the order of determination. If it has not been decided to determine the appearing character in , the appearing character is determined by lottery. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a specific character (for example, character 1) appearing in a special effect display is determined according to the order of determination in the specific effect display, the determined order is It is configured to be relatively low. That is, when a special effect display is performed in a specific effect state, not only is the advantageous state imparted, but also characters that are usually difficult to appear appear.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve interest in a series of productions (for example, battle production) executed in a predetermined game section (for example, RUSH mode).

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is decided to give an advantageous state in a specific effect state, when a specific effect display is performed, the characters appearing in the specific effect display are the winning characters. , and when it is not determined to give an advantageous state, the appearing character stored as a victorious character is not determined when a specific performance display is performed. That is, when an appearing character stored as a victorious character appears when a specific effect display is performed in a specific effect state, provision of an advantageous state is determined. Further, in this embodiment, when a special effect display is performed in a specific effect state, a specific character is also stored as a victorious character.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as a series of effects executed in a predetermined game section progresses, it is possible to change the degree of expectation for a big hit in a specific effect display, thereby improving interest.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when transitioning to a specific production state, it is possible to take over the history of the victorious character in the previous specific production state, and if the history of the victorious character is taken over, it is determined It is configured so that the determination order of the appearing characters that are present is inherited. By configuring in this way, depending on the presence or absence of a handover selection operation, a series of effects executed in a predetermined game section can be started from a state desired by the player, and the degree of expectation for a big hit in a specific effect display. can also be changed, and the interest can be improved.

[V winning process]
FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the V winning process executed by the sub CPU 71 . This V winning process is a process for determining the effect contents of the V winning effect, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, and is executed in the following steps.

As shown in FIG. 55, in S520, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the RUSH mode is on. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not V has been won in any of the jackpot game states shifted from the RUSH mode. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the RUSH mode is in effect, the process proceeds to S521. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that it is not in the RUSH mode, it ends the V winning processing routine. Note that the sub CPU 71 may perform the processing of S521 without performing this processing. That is, the sub CPU 71 may perform the following processing of S521 to S523 even in the normal mode or the special mode, for example.

In S521, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a win in the reserve. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines that the lottery result is a hit among the start memories stored in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) or the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4). Processing is performed to determine whether or not there is any such thing. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that there is a hit in the hold, the process proceeds to S522. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that there is no win in the reserve, the process proceeds to S523. In addition, in this embodiment, in the special symbol game, the second special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) rather than the start memory stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to (4). Since the start memory stored in is used preferentially, in this process, the lottery result is a hit among the start memories stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to (4). It is also possible to determine only whether or not there is any such thing.

In S522, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data for special V winning. When this process is finished, the V winning process routine is finished. Incidentally, an example of the V winning effect based on the special V winning effect data will be described later with reference to FIG.

In S523, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data for normal V winning. When this process is finished, the V winning process routine is finished. An example of the V winning effect based on the normal V winning effect data will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in this V winning process, furthermore, when it is determined in S520 that the RUSH mode is not in progress, the jackpot that shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends (for example, the first special symbol "jackpot 1 ” ~ “big hit 4”), and when it is determined that it is a big hit that shifts to the time-saving game state, it is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) ~ (4). Only determination is made as to whether or not there is a winning lottery result among the starting memories, and when it is determined that there is a winning lottery result, processing of S522 is performed to obtain the lottery result. If it is determined that there is no hit, the process of S523 may be performed. That is, when the V prize is won in the first jackpot game state that shifts from the normal mode to the RUSH mode, among the start memories stored in the first special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the lottery The result may suggest that there is a hit. Further, the sub CPU 71 may perform these processes even when it is determined in S520 that the RUSH mode is in progress. That is, even when the V prize is won in the RUSH mode, it is suggested that there is a lottery result among the start memories stored in the first special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4). You may make it As a result, even when the RUSH mode ends in the subsequent game and shifts to the normal mode, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that it may be possible to shift to the RUSH mode again, thereby improving the amusement of the game. It is possible to

[Production performed in the game machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 65, various effects in this embodiment will be described using screen display examples and the like.

[Screen display example of operation-linked effect]
56 to 58 are diagrams showing screen display examples of operation-linked effects. 56 to 58, a case where "scenario 1 (success)" is determined as the operation-linked effect scenario will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation-linked effect, when the current stage is from "0" to "3", the display area 4A displays "Continuous hits!" Along with the characters, an image schematically showing the pressing operation of the pressing operation button 9A is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, in each stage, when the stage transitions (that is, when the depression operation button 9A is operated and the stage transition "Yes" is determined), the images corresponding to the characters 1 to 3 are displayed. are sequentially increased and displayed. On the other hand, when the stage does not shift (that is, when the push operation button 9A is operated but the stage transition "no" is determined, or when the push operation button 9A is not operated), the current stage is maintained, Images corresponding to characters 1 to 3 do not increase. In each stage, when the effective time of the operation-linked performance has passed, in the case of the variation pattern ``04H'' (failure of the operation-linked performance), the operation-linked performance is failed, and it is notified that the performance does not develop. For the reason, the characters "Unfortunately... not everyone gathered..." are displayed, and in the case of the variation pattern "08H" or "12H" (successful operation-linked effect), the operation-linked effect failed but is reversed. , and the text "Unfortunately... but it has developed into a reach!" is displayed to notify that the performance will develop.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the operation-linked effect, when the current stage is "4" to "7", the display area 4A displays "Continuous hits!" Along with the characters, an image schematically showing the pressing operation of the pressing operation button 9A is displayed. Note that when the current stage is "7", it is a conditional stage transition period, so it is not necessary to prompt the user to press the push operation button 9A. is displayed, the player feels uncomfortable that it takes a long time to move to the next stage even if the pressing operation button 9A is pressed. However, if the current stage is a conditional stage transition period, an image different from that of other stages may be displayed. For example, an image schematically showing that the pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A is invalidated (that the operation of the pressing operation button 9A does not cause a step transition) is displayed together with the character “?”. Alternatively, an image with a different background color or character color may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, when the stage transitions in each stage (that is, when the current stage is "4" to "6", the depression operation button 9A is operated and the stage transition "yes" is determined. , if the current stage is "7", or if the push operation button 9A is operated after the conditional stage transition period has elapsed), the images corresponding to characters 4 to 7 are sequentially increased and displayed. ing. On the other hand, if the stage does not transition (that is, if the current stage is "4" to "6", the pressing operation button 9A is operated but the stage transition "no" is determined, or if the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the current stage is "7", or the push button 9A is not operated), the current stage is maintained and the images corresponding to characters 4-7 do not increase. In each stage, when the effective time of the operation-linked performance has passed, in the case of the variation pattern ``04H'' (failure of the operation-linked performance), the operation-linked performance is failed, and it is notified that the performance does not develop. For the reason, the characters "Unfortunately... not everyone gathered..." are displayed, and in the case of the variation pattern "08H" or "12H" (successful operation-linked effect), the operation-linked effect failed but is reversed. , and the text "Unfortunately... but it has developed into a reach!" is displayed to notify that the performance will develop.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the operation-linked effect, the display area 4A displays "Continuous hit!" Along with the characters, an image schematically showing the pressing operation of the pressing operation button 9A is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 58, when the current stage is "8" to "10", when the stage is changed (that is, when the depression operation button 9A is operated and the stage change "yes" is determined) ), images corresponding to characters 8 to 11 are sequentially increased and displayed. Further, when the current level is "11", if the level changes (that is, if the pressing operation button 9A is operated and the level change "yes" is determined), the image corresponding to the character 12 is displayed. After increasing and displaying, the characters "All members gather! Develop into reach!" are displayed to inform that the operation-linked effect is successful and the effect develops. On the other hand, in each stage, if the stage does not transition (that is, if the push operation button 9A is operated but the stage transition "no" is determined, or if the push operation button 9A is not operated), the current stage is maintained, and the images corresponding to characters 8-12 are not increased. In each stage, when the effective time of the operation-linked performance has passed, in the case of the variation pattern ``04H'' (failure of the operation-linked performance), the operation-linked performance is failed, and it is notified that the performance does not develop. For the reason, the characters "Unfortunately... not everyone gathered..." are displayed, and in the case of the variation pattern "08H" or "12H" (successful operation-linked effect), the operation-linked effect failed but is reversed. , and the text "Unfortunately... but it has developed into a reach!" is displayed to notify that the performance will develop.

Thus, in the present embodiment, a plurality of production stages (eg, "0" to "11") are sequentially shifted, and when the final production stage is shifted, a predetermined production (eg, super reach C) In a specific effect (for example, operation-linked effect) in which is performed, if the current effect stage is a predetermined effect stage, a predetermined operation (for example, pressing operation button 9A) was performed On the condition that it is decided by lottery whether to move to the next production stage, and if it is a specific production stage (for example, conditional stage transition period), after a predetermined transition condition is established (for example, condition On the condition that a predetermined operation is performed after the transition period with the stage has elapsed), it is configured to always shift to the next performance stage. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a more interesting big hit announcement.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the current production stage is a specific production stage, if a predetermined operation is performed after a predetermined period (for example, a conditional stage transition period) has passed, the next , and if a predetermined operation is performed before the predetermined period elapses, the transition to the next performance stage is not performed. By configuring in this way, in a specific performance, a state in which the performance stage does not shift even if a prescribed operation is performed, and a state in which the performance stage always shifts when the prescribed operation is performed are created. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to a player who has been able to smoothly transition to the stage of performance, and to diversify the performance.

Further, in this embodiment, when the current stage of presentation is a specific stage of presentation, a predetermined operation is disabled for a predetermined period of time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to control the performance in a specific performance stage so as to be more interlocked with the player's operation, and to improve the interest in the performance.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if a specific effect is performed based on a specific effect pattern (for example, operation-linked effect success) that may shift to the final effect stage, the final effect stage In some cases, it does not shift, but in this case, it is configured to perform a predetermined effect after performing a notice effect (for example, failure of operation-linked effect → reverse effect) that announces that a predetermined effect will be performed. . By constructing in this way, it is possible to give a certain sense of expectation for a big hit when a specific performance is performed while diversifying the transition of performance stages.

[Screen display example of handover selection operation screen]
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a screen display example of a handover selection operation screen. In FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, which will be described later, the display area 4A displays an operation guide display area 710 that guides that a selection operation is possible by rotating the jog dial 9B and that a determination operation is possible by pressing the push operation button 9A. is provided.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the display area 4A of the handover selection operation screen, the letters "10 seconds left" indicating the effective time of the handover selection operation are displayed, and to prompt the user to decide whether or not to hand over the history of the victorious character. , "Do you want to take over the history of the victorious characters?" and "Yes/No" are displayed. The player rotates the jog dial 9B, selects "yes", and presses the push operation button 9A, so that the winning character history can be handed over. Also, by rotating the jog dial 9B to select "No" and pressing the push operation button 9A, the winning character history can be prevented from being handed over. It is also possible to prevent the history of the winning character from being handed over by allowing the handover selection operation valid time to elapse without performing any operation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, in the display area 4A of the handover selection operation screen, it is displayed that accompanying the handover of the history of the victorious character, the obtained music is also handed over, and that the RUSH mode scenario is also handed over. The text "If you take over the history of the victorious character, the ○ acquired song/○ battle character appearance probability will also be taken over." is displayed.

[Screen display example of music selection operation screen]
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a screen display example of the music selection operation screen.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the display area 4A of the music selection operation screen, the text "10 seconds left" indicating the music selection operation effective time is displayed, and the message "Please select a music" is displayed to prompt the selection of music. ”, the characters “music 1” indicating the currently selected music, and a triangular cursor image are displayed. The player can select a desired song by rotating the jog dial 9B to change the currently selected song and pressing the push button 9A. Also, a preset song can be selected by allowing the song selection operation effective time to elapse without performing any operation.

[Screen display example in RUSH mode]
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a screen display example during the RUSH mode. As shown in FIG. 61, in the display area 4A during the RUSH mode, there are a symbol variation display area 700 that displays a plurality of decorative symbols in a variable and static manner, a first reserved ball display area 701, and a second reserved ball display. A region 702 and a variable holding ball display region 703 are provided. In the present embodiment, the symbol variable display area 700, the first reserved ball display area 701, the second reserved ball display area 702, and the variable reserved ball display area 703 can be used in other production modes (for example, normal mode or special mode). mode).

Further, as shown in FIG. 61, the display area 4A in the RUSH mode is provided with the item display area 800 described above, and the item display area 800 includes the first item display area 801 and the second item display area 801 described above. A display area 802, a third item display area 803, and a fourth item display area 804 are provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, the same item effect as during the RUSH mode may be performed during the effect mode other than the RUSH mode (for example, normal mode or special mode). In this case, the item display area 800, The first item display area 801, the second item display area 802, the third item display area 803, and the fourth item display area 804 are also displayed in other production modes (for example, normal mode and special mode). may

In addition, in the display area 4A, the positions, sizes, and positions where the pattern variation display area 700, the first reserved ball display area 701, the second reserved ball display area 702, the variable reserved ball display area 703, and the item display area 800 are provided. The range and the like are not limited to those shown in FIG. 61, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the second held ball display area 702 and the item display area 800 are arranged in parallel, the display mode of the held ball displayed in the second held ball display area 702 is updated, and the item displayed in the item display area 800 may be displayed in conjunction with the update of

[Example of items used in item production during RUSH mode]
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of items used in the item effect during the RUSH mode.

As shown in FIG. 62, in this embodiment, 12 items "item 1" to "item 12" corresponding to characters 1 to 12 are defined, and one of these items is the first item. Each item is displayed in one item display area 801 to fourth item display area 804 .

Note that "Item 1" to "Item 12" may be images that schematically show the characters 1 to 12 themselves, or images that show accessories (for example, weapons, etc.) for each of the characters 1 to 12. There may be. In addition, a special item that does not correspond to characters 1 to 12 is specified, and when this special item is displayed, the expectation for a big hit or acquisition is higher than when "item 1" to "item 12" are displayed. The number of game media may be increased.

Also, as shown in FIG. 62, in this embodiment, items corresponding to odd-numbered characters, items 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11, constitute a first group (odd-numbered group), and even-numbered characters , items 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12 constitute the second group (even group). This group (grouping) is referred to in S469 of FIG. 51, but it can also be referred to for other purposes. For example, if it is desired to suggest the degree of expectation of a predetermined jackpot (for example, "jackpot 7" of the first special symbol) with an odd number of actual rounds (for example, 7R), an item is selected from the first group. If you want to suggest the degree of expectation of a specific jackpot (for example, "jackpot 2" of the first special symbol) with an even number of actual rounds (for example, 8R), select an item from the second group. You may make it

Further, in the present embodiment, as information (second information) displayed in each of the first item display area 801 to the fourth item display area 804, "item 1" to "item 12" will be described as an example. However, the second information is not necessarily limited to "items", and other information as long as it has multiple types of display modes that allow the player to recognize different information. can also be used. For example, information consisting of 12 types of letters, numbers, or characters may be used. Moreover, the second information may have at least two different display modes, and the types are not limited to 12 types.

[Screen display example of item production in RUSH mode]
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a screen display example of item effects during the RUSH mode. Note that FIG. 63 describes the display in an item display area 800 (item area) that is part of the display area 4A.

In (a) of FIG. 63, "Item 1" is displayed as the first item in the first item display area 801 in the item area. At this time, when it is decided to display "Item 3" as the second item, "Item 1" displayed in the first item display area 801 is displayed as shown in FIG. ” is shifted and displayed in the second item display area 802 , and “Item 3” is newly displayed in the first item display area 801 . On the other hand, when it is decided to display "item 1" as the second item, "item 1" displayed in the first item display area 801 is displayed as shown in FIG. is shifted and displayed in the second item display area 802 , and “item 1” is newly displayed in the first item display area 801 .

Next, when it is decided to display "item 4" as the third item, as shown in (d) of FIG. The "item 1" that has been displayed is shifted to the second item display area 802 and the third item display area 803, and the "item 4" is newly displayed in the first item display area 801. FIG. Here, in the states of (c) and (d) of FIG. 63, two "items 1" are arranged. Therefore, when the state shifts to the jackpot game state at this time, the possibility of a jackpot with a substantial number of rounds of 4R (for example, a short-time medium hit 4R) is high. That is, the number of game media expected to be acquired is lower than in the case of three or four, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is decided to display "item 1" as the third item, it is displayed in the first item display area 801 and the second item display area 802 as shown in FIG. "Item 1" that has been displayed is shifted and displayed in the second item display area 802 and the third item display area 803, and "Item 1" is newly displayed in the first item display area 801. FIG. At this time, if it is determined to change the frame display mode of the item area to the special mode, the frame display mode of the item area changes to the special mode (green). In this case, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the frame display mode of the item area is the normal mode (white).

Next, when it is decided to display "item 2" as the fourth item, as shown in (f) of FIG. The “item 1” that has been displayed is shifted to the second item display area 802 to the fourth item display area 804 and “item 2” is newly displayed in the first item display area 801 . Here, in the states of (e) and (f) of FIG. 63, three "items 1" are arranged. Therefore, when the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state at this time, the possibility of a jackpot with a substantial number of rounds of 8R (for example, a short-time medium hit 8R) is high. That is, the expected number of game media to be acquired is higher than in the above-described case of two, and is lower than in the case of four, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is decided to display "item 1" as the fourth item, as shown in (g) of FIG. "Item 1" that has been displayed is shifted to the second item display area 802 to the fourth item display area 804, and "Item 1" is newly displayed in the first item display area 801. FIG. Here, in the state of (g) in FIG. 63, four "items 1" are arranged. Therefore, when the state shifts to the jackpot gaming state at this time, the possibility of a jackpot with a substantial number of rounds of 12R (for example, a short time hit 12R-1, 12R-2) is increased. In other words, the number of game media expected to be acquired is higher than in the case of two or three as described above. At this time, if it is determined to change the frame display mode of the item area to the special mode, the frame display mode of the item area changes to the special mode (red). In this case, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the frame display mode of the item area is the normal mode (white).

In addition, in the state of (f) of FIG. 63, when it is decided to display "item 5" as the fifth item, as shown in (h) of FIG. 63, the fourth item display area , and "Item 1" displayed in the second item display area 802 and the third item display area 803 are replaced with the third item display area 803 and the fourth item display area 804. , and "Item 2" displayed in the first item display area 801 is shifted and displayed in the second item display area 802, and "Item 5" is newly displayed as the first item. It is displayed in area 801 . Also, at this time, if it is determined to change the frame display mode of the item area to the normal mode, the frame display mode of the item area changes to the normal mode (white). At this time, if it is not determined to change the frame display mode of the item area to the normal mode and the frame display mode of the item area is maintained in the special mode, the items are not arranged in threes. However, the degree of expectation for a big hit and the expected number of game media to be acquired are maintained at the same level as in the case of three items.

[Screen display example of pending display mode change effect]
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a screen display example of the pending display mode change effect. In addition, in FIG. 64, the display in the second reserved ball display area 702 or the variable reserved ball display area 703, which is a part of the display area 4A, is described. In addition, in FIG. 64, "prefetching pending change pattern 408" is determined as the prefetching pending change pattern, and as the fluctuation pending change pattern, when the pending display mode at the start of the fluctuation is the display mode (green) , when the first pseudo-run is executed (pseudo-run 1), the hold display mode is changed to the display mode (red), and when the second pseudo-run is performed (pseudo-run 2), the hold display mode is changed to the display mode (rainbow ) has been determined (for example, “this variable pending change pattern 310”) will be described as an example.

As shown in FIG. 64, when the target variation of the look-ahead is the fourth held ball (held 4) in the second held ball display area 702, the fourth held ball in the second held ball display area 702 Change the display mode to the display mode (blue).

Next, when the target fluctuation of the prefetch becomes the third held ball (holding 3) in the second holding ball display area 702, the display mode of the third holding ball in the second holding ball display area 702 Change to display mode (yellow).

Next, when the target fluctuation of the prefetch becomes the second held ball (hold 2) in the second held ball display area 702, the display mode of the second held ball in the second held ball display area 702 Change to the display mode (green).

Next, when the target change for prefetching is the third held ball (held 1) in the second held ball display area 702, the display mode of the first held ball in the second held ball display area 702 Maintain the display mode (green).

Next, when the target fluctuation of the prefetch becomes the ball held (the fluctuation) in the ball holding display area 703, the display form of the ball holding in the ball holding display area 703 is maintained in the display form (green). do.

Next, when the target fluctuation of the look-ahead is the held ball in the fluctuation held ball display area 703, and the first pseudo-run is executed (pseudo-run 1), the held ball in the fluctuation held ball display area 703 is changed to the display mode (red).

Next, when the target fluctuation of the prefetch is the held ball in the fluctuation held ball display area 703, and the second pseudo-run is executed (pseudo-run 2), the held ball in the fluctuation held ball display area 703 is changed to a display mode (rainbow).

In addition, in FIG. 64, for the sake of convenience, the display mode of the held balls other than the prefetch target variation used in the description was described as the normal display mode (white), but it is not limited to this. do not have. For example, it is possible to sequentially change the pending display mode by determining the prefetching pending change pattern and the variation pending change pattern for the display mode of the pending ball other than the target fluctuation of the prefetching used in the explanation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as an example of change in the display mode of the held ball, a mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is sequentially changed by changing the display color of the held ball is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a change in the display mode of the held ball, it is possible to change the big hit expectation degree sequentially by changing the shape or pattern of the held ball. Also, each item displayed in the item area described above may be associated with the degree of expectation for a big win, and the degree of expectation for a big win may be changed sequentially by changing the form of each item of the held ball.

[Screen display example of V prize production]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a screen display example of the effect at the time of V winning. The upper part of FIG. 65 shows a screen display example of the V winning effect based on the normal V winning effect data, and the lower part of FIG. 65 shows the screen display of the V winning effect based on the special V winning effect data. An example is shown.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 65, in the V-winning effect based on the normal V-winning effect data, since there is no win in the reserve, the message "Congratulations on winning the V prize!" is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 65, in the V-winning effect based on the special V-winning effect data, since there is a hit in the hold, the message "Congratulations on winning a V prize" is displayed to notify that you have won a V prize. !” are displayed together with the characters “and ???” to suggest that there is a hit in the hold.

In addition, in the V-winning effect based on the special V-winning effect data, a display may be made to directly inform that there is a win in the reserve. For example, it is possible to display the characters "Congratulations on Renso on hold!!" to notify that there is a hit on hold.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in the specific game state (eg, jackpot game state), the game medium passes through the specific region (eg, specific region 38A) (V winning), special game state (eg, variable probability game state) ), a specific effect (for example, effect at the time of V winning) is performed, but in this case, it is determined to shift to the specific game state in the pending starting memory information. When there is starting memory information, it is configured to perform a different effect than when there is no starting memory information determined to shift to the specific game state. That is, when the game state after winning the V prize and the end of the specific game state is determined, that effect and the fact that the game will be held (or the possibility thereof) is notified. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately notify that the specific game state is on hold, and to improve interest.

As described above, according to this embodiment, it is possible to provide a game machine according to at least the first to tenth inventions described below.

[Gaming machines according to the first and second inventions]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko game machine, the number of suspensions is determined based on the number of suspended starting memory information (number of suspensions) and information indicating the determination result of whether or not to give an advantageous state (big hit lottery result). By changing the display mode of the reserved ball effect pattern showing , it has been proposed to perform a so-called "read-ahead effect" as a big hit notice (Prior Art Document 1: See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-70864).

However, in the gaming machine shown in Prior Art Document 1, the change pattern of the display mode of the reserved ball effect pattern is only determined from among a plurality of predetermined change patterns. There was a problem that it became monotonous.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The first and second inventions have been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of predicting a big win that further heightens the player's expectations.

The first invention is
a game board (for example, a game board 1) having a game area on which game media can roll;
a start area (for example, first start port 32, second start port 33) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
start memory information storage means (for example, main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start memory information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area;
Each time the start memory information is stored in the start memory information storage means, a specific game state transition determination means ( For example, the main CPU 61),
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display part 53, second special symbol display part 54),
A symbol variation display means (for example, a symbol variation display area 700) that performs symbol variation display according to the variation display of the identification information;
Hold information display means for displaying information (for example, hold ball) corresponding to the start memory information used for variable display of the identification information from the next time onward among the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage means. (For example, the first reserved ball display area 701, the second reserved ball display area 702),
Variation information display means for displaying information corresponding to the start memory information used for the current variation display of the identification information among the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage means (for example, the change pending sphere display area 703);
Whether or not to change the display mode of the information displayed on the pending information display means based on the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means is determined, and by changing the display mode of the information displayed on the reservation information display means according to the determination result, an effect (for example, prefetching hold change effect) that informs the degree of expectation to shift to the specific game state Prefetch expectation degree notification effect means (for example, sub CPU 71) that performs
Based on the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means, whether to change the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means By changing the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means according to the determination result, an effect (for example, the variation hold change and the variation expectation degree notification effect means (for example, sub CPU 71) that performs effect),
The symbol variation display means performs a specific symbol variation display (for example, a pseudo-continuation) in which the variation display of the symbols is pseudo-stopped and then the variation display is performed again until the variation display of the identification information is stopped. can be done multiple times,
The variation expectation degree notification effect means is displayed on the variation information display means based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means and the number of times of specific symbol variation display (for example, pseudo number) It is a game machine characterized by changing the display mode of the information displayed.

In the first invention, it is determined whether the display mode of information (for example, a held ball) corresponding to the starting memory information is changed before the variable display of the identification information using the starting memory information starts, Not only does the big hit notice is performed by changing the display mode according to the determination result, but also it is determined whether or not to change when the variable display of the identification information using the start storage information is started, and the determination result is obtained. A big hit is announced by changing the display mode according to the number. That is, not only is it determined whether or not to change the display mode of the held ball by the so-called "predictive effect", but it is also determined whether or not to change the display mode of the held ball in the variation. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a big hit notice that further heightens the player's expectation.

Further, in the first invention, when the display mode of the information corresponding to the starting memory information is changed in the variation, whether or not to shift to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state), and a specific symbol variation display ( For example, based on the number of pseudo-runs (for example, the number of pseudo-runs), the content of the change in the display mode is determined. By configuring in this way, for example, even if the display mode of the information corresponding to the start memory information does not change until the change starts, the information corresponding to the start memory information is displayed during the change. Since the aspect may change, the expectation of a big win can be given in all variations. In addition, since the content of the change in the display mode is determined by the number of pseudo-runs, it is possible to make an interesting big hit announcement by the execution of the pseudo-runs and the change in the display mode of the held ball in the variation.

The second invention is
a game board (for example, a game board 1) having a game area on which game media can roll;
a start area (for example, first start port 32, second start port 33) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
start memory information storage means (for example, main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start memory information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area;
Each time the start memory information is stored in the start memory information storage means, a specific game state transition determination means ( For example, the main CPU 61),
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display part 53, second special symbol display part 54),
A symbol variation display means (for example, a symbol variation display area 700) that performs symbol variation display according to the variation display of the identification information;
Hold information display means for displaying information (for example, hold ball) corresponding to the start memory information used for variable display of the identification information from the next time onward among the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage means. (For example, the first reserved ball display area 701, the second reserved ball display area 702),
Variation information display means for displaying information corresponding to the start memory information used for the current variation display of the identification information among the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage means (for example, the change pending sphere display area 703);
Whether or not to change the display mode of the information displayed on the pending information display means based on the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means is determined, and by changing the display mode of the information displayed on the reservation information display means according to the determination result, an effect (for example, prefetching hold change effect) that informs the degree of expectation to shift to the specific game state Prefetch expectation degree notification effect means (for example, sub CPU 71) that performs
Based on the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage means and the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means, whether to change the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means By changing the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means according to the determination result, an effect (for example, the variation hold change and the variation expectation degree notification effect means (for example, sub CPU 71) that performs effect),
When the display mode of the information displayed on the reserved information display means is changed by the read-ahead expectation level notification effect means, the change expectation level notification effect means, when the display mode of the information displayed on the reserved information display means is changed, The game machine is characterized in that the display mode of the information displayed on the variation information display means is changed based on the result of determination by the specific game state transition determination means.

In the second invention, it is determined whether the display mode of information (for example, a held ball) corresponding to the starting memory information is changed before the variable display of the identification information using the starting memory information starts, Not only does the big hit notice is performed by changing the display mode according to the determination result, but also it is determined whether or not to change when the variable display of the identification information using the start storage information is started, and the determination result is obtained. A big hit is announced by changing the display mode according to the number. That is, not only is it determined whether or not to change the display mode of the held ball by the so-called "predictive effect", but it is also determined whether or not to change the display mode of the held ball in the variation. ing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a big hit notice that further heightens the player's expectation.

Further, in the second invention, when the display mode of the information corresponding to the starting memory information is changed in the change, if the display mode is changed before the change starts, after the change and whether or not to transition to a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state), the content of the change in the display mode is determined. By configuring in this way, the degree of expectation for a big hit indicated by the display mode of the information corresponding to the starting memory information that changed before the variation started is inherited in the variation, and furthermore, the display mode changes in the variation. Since the degree of expectation for a big hit indicated by the display mode may increase, it is interesting to link the change in the display mode of the held ball due to the so-called "predictive effect" and the change in the display mode of the held ball due to the fluctuation. A high jackpot notice can be performed.

Moreover, the second invention is
The change expectation level notification effect means causes the display mode of the information displayed on the reserved information display means to shift to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means by the look-ahead expectation level notification effect means. is changed to a specific display mode (for example, display mode (rainbow)) with a high degree of expectation that is determined to be changed, it is determined to change the display mode of the information displayed on the variable information display means. The game machine described above is characterized in that it does not.

Further, in the second invention, the display mode of the information corresponding to the starting memory information changed before the change starts is a specific display mode (for example, a display mode (rainbow)) with a high expectation of a big hit. If there is, it is configured not to change the display mode in the change. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by a more complicated notification despite the fact that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high, and to prevent the player from being confused. Control burden can be reduced.

According to the first and second inventions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of predicting a big hit that further heightens the expectation of the player.

[Game machine according to the third invention]
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine displays an effect prompting the player to operate an external input switch, and when the external input switch is operated, the expectation of a big win indicates the high probability of shifting to a big win game state. It has been proposed to give a big hit notice by displaying the number of times (Prior Art Document 2: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-105247).

However, in the gaming machine shown in Prior Art Document 2, it is only determined whether or not the degree of expectation for a big win is displayed depending on whether or not the external input switch is operated. There was a problem that it became monotonous.

The third invention has been made in view of the above problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of giving notice of a more interesting advantageous state.

The third invention is
Advantageous state determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to provide an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player;
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display portion 53, second special symbol display portion 54) for performing variable display of identification information based on the determination result of the advantageous state determination means;
Production execution means for producing production (for example, liquid crystal display device 4),
Production control means (for example, sub CPU71) for controlling the production execution means,
An operation means (for example, a pressing operation button 9A) capable of accepting a predetermined operation of the player,
The production executing means is capable of performing a specific production (for example, operation-linked production),
The specific effect is to sequentially transition through a plurality of effect stages (for example, "0" to "11"), and when the final effect stage is reached, a predetermined effect (for example, super Reach C) is performed,
The plurality of production stages include a predetermined production stage and a specific production stage (for example, a conditional stage transition period),
The production control means, in the specific production,
When the current performance stage is the predetermined performance stage, it is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the next performance stage on the condition that the predetermined operation is performed, and depending on the determination result. Move to the next production stage,
When the current stage of presentation is the specific stage of presentation, on the condition that the predetermined operation is performed after a predetermined transition condition has been established (for example, after a conditional stage transition period has passed), This game machine is characterized by shifting to the next performance stage.

In the third invention, a plurality of production stages (for example, "0" to "11") are sequentially shifted, and when the final production stage is shifted, a predetermined production (for example, Super Reach C) is performed. In a specific effect (for example, operation-linked effect), if the current effect stage is a predetermined effect stage, a predetermined operation (for example, pressing operation button 9A) is performed. Then, it is determined by lottery whether or not to move to the next production stage, and if it is a specific production stage (for example, conditional stage transition period), after a predetermined transition condition is established (for example, conditional stage transition After the period has elapsed), it is configured to always move to the next production stage on condition that a predetermined operation is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make a more interesting big hit announcement.

A third aspect of the present invention is characterized in that the predetermined transition condition is established when a predetermined period (for example, a conditional stage transition period) elapses in the specific production stage. It is a game machine.

Further, in the third invention, when the current stage of presentation is a specific stage of presentation, if a predetermined operation is performed after a predetermined period of time (for example, a conditional stage transition period) has elapsed, the If a predetermined operation is performed before the transition to the next stage of presentation and the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the transition to the next stage of presentation is prevented. By configuring in this way, in a specific performance, a state in which the performance stage does not shift even if a prescribed operation is performed, and a state in which the performance stage always shifts when the prescribed operation is performed are created. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to a player who has been able to smoothly transition to the stage of performance, and to diversify the performance.

Moreover, the third invention is
The above-described operation means, in the specific effect, when the current effect stage is the specific effect stage, the operation means disables the reception of the predetermined operation during the predetermined period. It is a game machine.

Further, in the third invention, when the current stage of presentation is a specific stage of presentation, a predetermined operation is disabled for a predetermined period of time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to control the performance in a specific performance stage so as to be more interlocked with the player's operation, and to improve the interest in the performance.

Moreover, the third invention is
The specific effect includes a first specific effect pattern (for example, operation-linked effect success) that may shift to the final effect stage, and a second specific effect pattern that has no possibility of moving to the final effect stage. Production patterns (for example, operation-linked production failure) and
The effect control means controls whether the specific effect is performed based on the first specific effect pattern or the specific effect is performed based on the second specific effect pattern. Even if there is, when a specific time (for example, operation-linked effect effective time) has passed since the specific effect started, the specific effect is terminated,
When the specific performance performed on the basis of the first specific performance pattern is terminated, if the transition to the final performance stage is not made, an advance notice that the predetermined performance will be performed. The game machine described above is characterized in that after performing an effect (for example, operation-linked effect failure→reversal effect), the predetermined effect is performed.

Further, in the third invention, even if a specific effect is performed based on a specific effect pattern (for example, operation-linked effect success) that may shift to the final effect stage, the final effect stage However, in this case, it is configured to perform a notice effect (for example, operation-linked effect failure → reverse effect) that foretells that a predetermined effect will be performed, and then perform a predetermined effect. there is By constructing in this way, it is possible to give a certain sense of expectation for a big hit when a specific performance is performed while diversifying the transition of performance stages.

According to the third invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of giving notice of a more interesting advantageous state.

[Gaming machines according to the fourth and fifth inventions]
A game machine such as a pachinko game machine has been proposed in which a player can select a piece of music to be played during an advantageous state (Prior Art Document 3: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-125519).

By the way, in the gaming machine shown in prior art document 3, since songs that can be selected by the player are predetermined, there is a problem that the player loses interest in selecting songs after playing the game for a certain period of time.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to increase the number of selectable songs each time a game is played to a certain extent, for example, a certain number of times, but even in this case, the interest is not improved. It is hard to say that it is possible to plan sufficiently.

The fourth and fifth inventions have been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and provide a game that can improve interest by adding value when increasing the number of songs that can be selected by the player. The purpose is to provide

The fourth invention is
Advantageous state determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to provide an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player;
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display portion 53, second special symbol display portion 54) for performing variable display of identification information based on the determination result of the advantageous state determination means;
operation means (for example, pressing operation button 9A, jog dial 9B) capable of receiving operations related to player's performance;
Effect display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4) that performs effect display;
music output means (for example, speaker 10) for outputting music;
An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that controls the effect display means and the music output means,
The effect display means causes one character to appear from among a plurality of predetermined characters (for example, characters 1 to 12) in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), A character) and a predetermined character (for example, a main character) play against each other, and a specific effect display (for example, a "race battle reach" effect) is performed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is granted according to the result of the match. is possible and
The specific effect display includes a first specific effect display pattern (e.g., "running race battle ready win") informing that the result of the battle is the victory of the predetermined character and the advantageous state is granted. ), and a second specific effect display pattern (e.g., “race battle reach loss”) that informs that the battle result is the victory of the appearing character and that the advantageous state is not granted,
The music output means is capable of outputting a plurality of music corresponding to the plurality of characters,
The production control means is
When the advantageous state determining means determines that the advantageous state is to be given in the specific effect state, and when the first specific effect display pattern is selected, the character is selected from among the plurality of characters. Hit time character determining means for determining the appearing character (for example, the processing of S447 in the RUSH mode processing shown in FIG. 50);
Winning character history storage means for storing the appearing character determined by the winning character determining means (for example, the process of S503 in the winning start process shown in FIG. 54);
Music increasing means (for example, FIG. 54 The processing of S504 in the winning start time processing shown in );
When it is determined by the advantageous state determination means that the advantageous state is not to be given in the specific effect state, and when the second specific effect display pattern is selected, the winning character history storage is performed. a character determination means (for example, the processing of S448 and S449 in the RUSH mode processing shown in FIG. 50) for determining the appearing character from among the plurality of characters excluding the appearing character stored by the means. It is a gaming machine characterized by

In the fourth invention, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), when it is determined to give an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), a specific effect display (for example, "race battle reach ” effect) is performed, the character that appears in the specific effect display (for example, the fighting character) is stored as the victorious character, and the music corresponding to the victorious character is newly acquired music. is configured to be selectable. Further, in a specific effect state, when it is not decided to give an advantageous state, and when the specific effect display is performed, the appearing character stored as the victorious character is not determined. ing. That is, when an appearing character stored as a victorious character appears when a specific effect display is performed in a specific effect state, provision of an advantageous state is determined.

Therefore, in the fourth invention, it is possible to provide an added value of changing the degree of expectation for a big hit when a specific performance display is performed in a specific performance state in accordance with an increase in the number of songs that can be selected. can be improved.

The fifth invention is
Advantageous state determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to provide an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player;
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display portion 53, second special symbol display portion 54) for performing variable display of identification information based on the determination result of the advantageous state determination means;
Operation means (for example, pressing operation button 9A, jog dial 9B) capable of accepting operations related to player's performance;
Effect display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4) that performs effect display;
music output means (for example, speaker 10) for outputting music;
An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that controls the effect display means and the music output means,
The effect display means causes one character to appear from among a plurality of predetermined characters (for example, characters 1 to 12) in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), A character) and a predetermined character (for example, a main character) play against each other, and a specific effect display (for example, a "race battle reach" effect) is performed to notify whether or not the advantageous state is granted according to the result of the match. is possible and
The specific effect display includes a first specific effect display pattern (e.g., "running race battle ready win") informing that the result of the battle is the victory of the predetermined character and the advantageous state is granted. ), and a second specific effect display pattern (e.g., “race battle reach loss”) that informs that the battle result is the victory of the appearing character and that the advantageous state is not granted,
The music output means is capable of outputting a plurality of music corresponding to the plurality of characters,
The production control means is
When performing the specific effect display in the specific effect state, one character determination order is selected from a plurality of predetermined character determination orders (for example, scenarios 1 to 24) in which the character determination order is predetermined. Character determination order determination means (for example, the process of S362 in the pressed operation button operation determination process shown in FIG. 46) for determining
A character determination order for determining whether or not to determine the appearing character using the character determination order determined by the character determination order determining means when performing the specific effect display in the specific effect state. use determining means (for example, the processing of S446 in the RUSH mode processing shown in FIG. 50);
When the advantageous state determination means determines to impart the advantageous state in the specific effect state, and when the first specific effect display pattern is selected, the character determination order use determining means If it is decided to use the character determination order by the character determination order determining means, the appearing character is determined from the plurality of characters in accordance with the character determination order determined by the character determination order determination means, and the character If it is not determined by the determination order use determination means to use the character determination order, a winning character determination means (for example, shown in FIG. 50) that determines the appearing character from the plurality of characters by lot Processing of S447 in RUSH mode processing);
Winning character history storage means for storing the appearing character determined by the winning character determining means (for example, the process of S503 in the winning start process shown in FIG. 54);
Music increasing means (for example, FIG. 54 The processing of S504 in the winning start time processing shown in );
When it is determined by the advantageous state determining means that the advantageous state is not to be given in the specific effect state, and when the second specific effect display pattern is selected, the character determination order determining means Loss time character determining means (for example, in FIG. 50 Processing of S448 and S449 in the processing during the RUSH mode shown).

In the fifth invention, when it is determined to provide an advantageous state (eg, a jackpot gaming state) in a specific rendering state (eg, RUSH mode), a specific rendering display (eg, "Kekko Battle Reach ” effect) is performed, the character that appears in the specific effect display (for example, the fighting character) is stored as the victorious character, and the music corresponding to the victorious character is newly acquired music. is configured to be selectable. Further, in a specific effect state, when it is not decided to give an advantageous state, and when the specific effect display is performed, the appearing character stored as the victorious character is not determined. ing. That is, when an appearing character stored as a victorious character appears when a specific effect display is performed in a specific effect state, provision of an advantageous state is determined.

Therefore, in the fifth invention, it is possible to provide an added value of changing the degree of expectation for a big hit when a specific performance display is performed in a specific performance state in accordance with an increase in the number of songs that can be selected. can be improved.

In addition, in the fifth aspect, the order of determination of characters appearing in a specific effect state (for example, a scenario in RUSH mode) is determined, and when a specific effect display is performed, the characters appearing are determined in accordance with the order of determination. In some cases, it is determined, and in other cases, the appearing character is determined by lottery. Furthermore, in the fifth aspect, when it is not decided to impart an advantageous state, and when a specific effect display is performed, an appearing character that is not stored as a victorious character is decided in accordance with the decision order. is configured to That is, when a specific performance display is performed in a specific performance state, the appearing character can be intentionally or unintentionally determined within a range in which there is no discrepancy in the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Therefore, in the fifth aspect, while ensuring the randomness of the characters that appear when a specific effect display is performed in a specific effect state, it is possible to match the degree of expectation for a big hit and improve the entertainment. can.

According to the fourth and fifth inventions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest by giving added value when increasing the number of songs that can be selected by the player.

[Gaming machines according to the sixth and seventh inventions]
In a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, if a specific reach is generated during a special game state (probability variable game state) in which the determination result of giving an advantageous state is likely to be obtained and it is shifted to an advantageous state, in a series of effects A game in which a story progresses has been proposed (Prior Art Document 4: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-115444).

However, in the gaming machine shown in Prior Art Document 4, the story in the series of presentations only progresses in a predetermined order, so the series of presentations is monotonous and lacks interest. .

The sixth and seventh inventions have been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing interest in a series of effects executed in a predetermined game interval. .

The sixth invention is
Advantageous state determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to provide an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player;
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display portion 53, second special symbol display portion 54) for performing variable display of identification information based on the determination result of the advantageous state determination means;
Effect display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4) that performs effect display;
An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that controls the effect display means,
The effect display means is
In a specific production state (for example, RUSH mode), one character appears from among a plurality of predetermined characters (for example, characters 1 to 12), and the appearing character (for example, a fighting character) and a predetermined character (e.g., the main character) fights against each other, and a specific effect display (e.g., "Running Battle Reach" effect) that informs whether or not the advantageous state is granted according to the result of the battle;
In the specific production state, a specific character (for example, character 1) among the plurality of characters appears, the specific character and the predetermined character are fought, and the advantageous state is given according to the result of the battle. It is possible to perform a special production display (for example, a “special character battle reach” production) that informs that
The production control means is
When performing the specific effect display in the specific effect state, one character determination order is selected from a plurality of predetermined character determination orders (for example, scenarios 1 to 24) in which the character determination order is predetermined. Character determination order determination means (for example, the process of S362 in the pressed operation button operation determination process shown in FIG. 46) for determining
A character determination order for determining whether or not to determine the appearing character using the character determination order determined by the character determination order determining means when performing the specific effect display in the specific effect state. use determining means (for example, the processing of S446 in the RUSH mode processing shown in FIG. 50);
When performing the specific effect display in the specific effect state, if the use of the character determination order is determined by the character determination order use determination means, the character determination order determination means determines The appearing character is determined from the plurality of characters in accordance with the determined character determination order, and if it is not determined by the character determination order use determination means to use the character determination order, the A character determination means for determining the appearing character from among a plurality of characters (for example, the processing of S447 in the RUSH mode processing shown in FIG. 50),
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the plurality of character determination orders, the specific character has a relatively low rank determined as the appearing character by the character determination means.

In the sixth invention, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), a specific effect display (for example, "race battle reach" effect) that informs whether or not an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) is given ) and a special effect display (for example, a “special character battle reach” effect) for notifying that an advantageous state is granted. Further, in the sixth aspect, the order of determination of appearing characters (e.g., battle characters) appearing in a specific effect display (e.g., scenario during RUSH mode) is determined, and when a specific effect display is performed, It is configured such that whether or not to determine the appearing character is further determined in this order of determination. In the sixth aspect, when the specific effect display is performed, if it is decided to determine the appearing characters in the determined order, the appearing characters are determined in accordance with the determined order. If it has not been decided to determine the appearing characters in order, the appearing characters are determined by lottery. Furthermore, in the sixth aspect, the order in which a specific character (for example, character 1) appearing in a special effect display is determined when the appearing character is determined in accordance with the order of determination in the specific effect display. is relatively low. That is, when a special effect display is performed in a specific effect state, not only is the advantageous state imparted, but also characters that are usually difficult to appear appear.

Therefore, in the sixth aspect, it is possible to improve interest in a series of productions (for example, battle production) executed in a predetermined game section (for example, RUSH mode).

The seventh invention is
Advantageous state determination means (for example, main CPU 61) for determining whether or not to provide an advantageous state (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player;
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display portion 53, second special symbol display portion 54) for performing variable display of identification information based on the determination result of the advantageous state determination means;
Effect display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 4) that performs effect display;
An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that controls the effect display means,
The effect display means is
In a specific production state (for example, RUSH mode), one character appears from among a plurality of predetermined characters (for example, characters 1 to 12), and the appearing character (for example, a fighting character) and a predetermined character (e.g., the main character) fights against each other, and a specific effect display (e.g., "Running Battle Reach" effect) that informs whether or not the advantageous state is granted according to the result of the battle;
In the specific production state, a specific character (for example, character 1) among the plurality of characters appears, the specific character and the predetermined character are fought, and the advantageous state is given according to the result of the battle. It is possible to perform a special production display (for example, a “special character battle reach” production) that informs that
The specific effect display includes a first specific effect display pattern (e.g., "running race battle ready win") informing that the result of the battle is the victory of the predetermined character and the advantageous state is granted. ), and a second specific effect display pattern (e.g., “race battle reach loss”) that informs that the battle result is the victory of the appearing character and that the advantageous state is not granted,
The production control means is
When performing the specific effect display in the specific effect state, one character determination order is selected from a plurality of predetermined character determination orders (for example, scenarios 1 to 24) in which the character determination order is predetermined. Character determination order determination means (for example, the process of S362 in the pressed operation button operation determination process shown in FIG. 46) for determining
A character determination order for determining whether or not to determine the appearing character using the character determination order determined by the character determination order determining means when performing the specific effect display in the specific effect state. use determining means (for example, the processing of S446 in the RUSH mode processing shown in FIG. 50);
When the advantageous state determination means determines to impart the advantageous state in the specific effect state, and when the first specific effect display pattern is selected, the character determination order use determining means If it is decided to use the character determination order by the character determination order determining means, the appearing character is determined from the plurality of characters in accordance with the character determination order determined by the character determination order determination means, and the character If it is not determined by the determination order use determination means to use the character determination order, a winning character determination means (for example, shown in FIG. 50) that determines the appearing character from the plurality of characters by lot Processing of S447 in RUSH mode processing);
Winning character history storage means for storing the appearing character determined by the winning character determining means (for example, the process of S503 in the winning start process shown in FIG. 54);
When it is determined by the advantageous state determining means that the advantageous state is not to be given in the specific effect state, and when the second specific effect display pattern is selected, the character determination order determining means Loss time character determining means (for example, in FIG. 50 Processing of S448 and S449 in the processing during the RUSH mode shown) and
In the character determination order of the plurality of characters, the specific character has a relatively low rank determined as the appearing character by the character determination means,
The winning character history storage means stores the specific character as the appearing character when the special effect display is performed in the specific effect state.

In the seventh invention, in a specific effect state (for example, RUSH mode), a specific effect display (for example, "race battle reach" effect) that informs whether or not an advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state) is given ) and a special effect display (for example, a “special character battle reach” effect) for notifying that an advantageous state is granted. In addition, in the seventh aspect, the order of determination of characters (eg, battle characters) that appear in a specific effect display (eg, scenario during RUSH mode) is determined, and when a specific effect display is performed, It is configured such that whether or not to determine the appearing character is further determined in this order of determination. In the seventh aspect, when the specific effect display is performed, if it is decided to determine the appearing characters in the determined order, the appearing characters are determined in accordance with the determined order. If it has not been decided to determine the appearing characters in order, the appearing characters are determined by lottery. Furthermore, in the seventh aspect, the order in which a specific character (for example, character 1) that appears in a special effect display is determined when the appearance character is determined in accordance with the order of determination in the specific effect display. is relatively low. That is, when a special effect display is performed in a specific effect state, not only is the advantageous state imparted, but also characters that are usually difficult to appear appear.

Therefore, in the seventh invention, it is possible to improve interest in a series of productions (for example, battle production) executed in a predetermined game section (for example, RUSH mode).

Further, in the seventh aspect, when it is determined that an advantageous state is to be imparted in a specific effect state, if a specific effect display is performed, the character appearing in the specific effect display has already won. When the character is stored as a character and it is not determined to give an advantageous state, the appearing character stored as a victorious character is not determined when a specific performance display is performed. That is, when an appearing character stored as a victorious character appears when a specific effect display is performed in a specific effect state, provision of an advantageous state is determined. Further, in the seventh invention, when a special effect display is performed in a specific effect state, a specific character is also stored as a victorious character.

Therefore, in the seventh invention, as a series of performances executed in a predetermined game section progresses, it is possible to change the degree of expectation for a big hit in a specific performance display, thereby improving interest.

Moreover, the seventh invention is
Equipped with operation means (for example, pressing operation button 9A, jog dial 9B) capable of accepting operations related to player's performance,
When the player performs a handover selection operation to the operation means when the state is shifted to the specific effect state, the appearance stored in the hit character history storage means in the previous specific effect state In the gaming machine described above, the characters are handed over and the character determination order determined by the character determination order determining means is also handed over.

In addition, in the seventh invention, when a transition is made to a specific effect state, it is possible to take over the history of the victorious character in the previous specific effect state, and when the history of the victorious character is taken over, the It is configured so that the determination order of the characters appearing in the game is inherited. By configuring in this way, depending on the presence or absence of a handover selection operation, a series of effects executed in a predetermined game section can be started from a state desired by the player, and the degree of expectation for a big hit in a specific effect display. can also be changed, and the interest can be improved.

According to the sixth and seventh inventions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing interest in a series of effects executed in a predetermined game section.

[Gaming machines according to the eighth and ninth inventions]
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko game machine, the number of suspensions is determined based on the number of suspended starting memory information (number of suspensions) and information indicating the determination result of whether or not to give an advantageous state (big hit lottery result). By changing the display mode of the reserved ball effect pattern showing , it has been proposed to perform a so-called "read-ahead effect" as a big hit notice (Prior Art Document 1: See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-70864).

However, in the gaming machine shown in Prior Art Document 1, the change pattern of the display mode of the reserved ball effect pattern is only determined from among a plurality of predetermined change patterns. There was a problem that it became monotonous.

In addition, in such a gaming machine, there is a limit to the information that can be reported by changing the display mode of the reserved ball effect pattern, and there is a demand for a gaming machine that can report more diverse information in a new mode. was

The eighth and ninth inventions have been made in view of the above-described problems, and provide a game capable of notifying a player of a greater variety of information in a novel manner while performing a big hit notice that further heightens the player's expectation. The purpose is to provide

The eighth invention is
a game board (for example, a game board 1) having a game area on which game media can roll;
a start area (for example, first start port 32, second start port 33) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
start memory information storage means (for example, main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start memory information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area;
Each time the start memory information is stored in the start memory information storage means, a specific game state transition determination means ( For example, the main CPU 61),
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display part 53, second special symbol display part 54),
A symbol variation display means (for example, a symbol variation display area 700) that performs symbol variation display according to the variation display of the identification information;
First information display means (for example, first held ball display area 701, second held ball) for displaying first information (for example, held ball) corresponding to the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage means Display area 702, the variation holding ball display area 703),
a second information display means (for example, an item display area 800) capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of second information (for example, items) different from the first information;
First display mode determination means for determining the display mode of the first information displayed on the first information display means (for example, pending display shown in FIG. 53 Aspect change effect processing);
Second display mode determination means for sequentially determining the display mode of the second information displayed by the second information display means (for example, RUSH shown in FIG. 51 item production processing in mode) and
The specific game state includes a plurality of specific game states with different numbers of playable media (e.g., actual number of rounds),
The first information display means determines the display mode of the first information displayed on the first information display means based on whether the transition to the specific game state is made by the first display mode determination means. By doing so, it is possible to notify the degree of expectation of a big hit indicating whether or not to shift to the specific game state,
The second information display means displays the second information displayed on the second information display means by the second display mode determining means based on the number of game media that can be obtained when the specific game state is entered. By determining the display mode of the information in 2, it is possible to notify the number of game media expected to be acquired, which indicates the number of game media that can be acquired in the case of shifting to the specific game state. It is a game machine that

Moreover, the eighth invention is
The second display mode determining means continuously displays the second information in the same display mode on the second information display means as the number of game media expected to be obtained increases when the game state is shifted to the specific game state. The game machine described above is characterized in that the display mode of the second information is determined so that the number of items displayed increases.

In the eighth invention, the first information (e.g., hold The degree of expectation for a big hit is reported by the display mode of the ball), and the expected number of game media to be obtained is indicated by the display mode of the second information (for example, items) displayed by the second information display means (for example, the item display area 800). It is configured so that it can be notified. That is, by combining these pieces of information, it is possible to guess which specific game state (eg, jackpot game state) the degree of expectation for shifting to is high. By constructing in this way, it is possible to give a big hit notice that further heightens the expectation of the player, and to notify more diverse information in a novel manner.

Moreover, the eighth invention is
The second information display means includes a plurality of second information display areas (for example, a first item display area 801 to a fourth item display area 804) for displaying each of the plurality of second information, and the plurality of A frame display area (for example, an item area frame display area) other than the second information display area,
When it is determined by the second display mode determining means that the second information in the same display mode is to be continuously displayed on the second information display means for a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, the Frame display mode determination means for determining whether the display mode of the frame display area is a special mode based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means (for example, item effect processing during RUSH mode shown in FIG. 51) The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it comprises:

Further, in the eighth invention, when a predetermined condition (for example, three items or more) is satisfied for the second information displayed on the second information display means, the second information display means itself is further displayed. The display contents (for example, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area) may also change, and when it changes, the expected jackpot degree and/or the expected number of game media to be acquired are configured to change. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the contents of information to be notified by the second information display means and to enhance the interest of the game.

The ninth invention is
a game board (for example, a game board 1) having a game area on which game media can roll;
a start area (for example, first start port 32, second start port 33) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
start memory information storage means (for example, main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start memory information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area;
Each time the start memory information is stored in the start memory information storage means, a specific game state transition determination means ( For example, the main CPU 61),
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display part 53, second special symbol display part 54),
A symbol variation display means (for example, a symbol variation display area 700) that performs symbol variation display according to the variation display of the identification information;
First information display means (for example, first held ball display area 701, second held ball) for displaying first information (for example, held ball) corresponding to the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage means Display area 702, the variation holding ball display area 703),
a second information display means (for example, an item display area 800) capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of second information (for example, items) different from the first information;
First display mode determination means for determining the display mode of the first information displayed on the first information display means (for example, pending display shown in FIG. 53 Aspect change effect processing);
Second display mode determination means for sequentially determining the display mode of the second information displayed by the second information display means (for example, RUSH shown in FIG. 51 item production processing in mode) and
The specific game state includes a plurality of specific game states with different numbers of playable media (e.g., actual number of rounds),
The first information display means determines the display mode of the first information displayed on the first information display means based on whether the transition to the specific game state is made by the first display mode determination means. By doing so, it is possible to notify the degree of expectation of a big hit indicating whether or not to shift to the specific game state,
The second information display means displays the second information displayed on the second information display means by the second display mode determining means based on the number of game media that can be obtained when the specific game state is entered. By determining the display mode of the information in 2, it is possible to notify the expected number of game media to be acquired, which indicates the number of game media that can be acquired when shifting to the specific game state,
The second display mode determining means continuously displays the second information in the same display mode on the second information display means as the number of game media expected to be obtained increases when the game state is shifted to the specific game state. The display mode of the second information is determined so that the number of items to be displayed increases, but the first information display means displays the first is displayed, the second information is displayed so that the second information in the same display mode is not displayed continuously for a predetermined number (for example, three) or more on the second information display means. This gaming machine is characterized by determining a display mode.

In the ninth invention, the first information (e.g., hold The degree of expectation for a big hit is reported by the display mode of the ball), and the expected number of game media to be obtained is indicated by the display mode of the second information (for example, items) displayed by the second information display means (for example, the item display area 800). It is configured so that it can be notified. That is, by combining these pieces of information, it is possible to guess which specific game state (eg, jackpot game state) the degree of expectation for shifting to is high. By constructing in this way, it is possible to give a big hit notice that further heightens the expectation of the player, and to notify more diverse information in a novel manner.

Further, in the ninth invention, when the display mode of the first information is a specific display mode (for example, a display mode (rainbow)) with a high degree of expectation for a big hit, the second information display means displays the same display mode. The second information is configured so as not to be continuously displayed for a predetermined number (for example, three) or more. By constructing in this way, for example, even though it is reported that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, it is reported that the number of game media expected to be acquired is low, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. can be done. Also, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by a more complicated notification despite the fact that the degree of expectation for the big win is high.

Moreover, the ninth invention is
The second information display means includes a plurality of second information display areas (for example, a first item display area 801 to a fourth item display area 804) for displaying each of the plurality of second information, and the plurality of A frame display area (for example, an item area frame display area) other than the second information display area,
When it is determined by the second display mode determining means that the second information in the same display mode is to be continuously displayed on the second information display means for a predetermined number (for example, three) or more, the Frame display mode determination means for determining whether the display mode of the frame display area is a special mode based on the determination result by the specific game state transition determination means (for example, item effect processing during RUSH mode shown in FIG. 51) The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it comprises:

Further, in the ninth invention, when a predetermined condition (for example, three items or more) is satisfied for the second information displayed on the second information display means, the second information display means itself is further displayed. The display contents (for example, the frame display mode in the item area frame display area) may also change, and when it changes, the expected jackpot degree and/or the expected number of game media to be acquired are configured to change. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the contents of information to be notified by the second information display means and to enhance the interest of the game.

According to the eighth and ninth inventions, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying the player of the big win to further increase the expectation of the player and notifying more diverse information in a novel manner.

[Gaming machine according to the tenth invention]
In a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, if it is determined that a transition to a jackpot game state is to be made in the reserved starting memory information when shifting to the jackpot game state, the game machine is in the jackpot game state. In addition, the number of rounds scheduled to be executed during the next jackpot game state is added to the number of rounds scheduled to be executed during the next jackpot game state, and is displayed to notify the so-called "reservation renso" (prior art Document 5: See JP-A-2006-130192).

However, in the gaming machine shown in Prior Art Document 5, for example, when it is determined that the jackpot game state in which the number of rounds to be executed is small is held and the above notification is made, the game is rather stopped. In addition, there is a problem that, for example, depending on the specifications of the game machine, the above notification may not be performed appropriately.

A tenth aspect of the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of appropriately informing the player that the jackpot game state continues to be held, in such a way as to improve interest. With the goal.

A tenth invention is
a game board (for example, a game board 1) having a game area on which game media can roll;
a start area (for example, first start port 32, second start port 33) provided in the game area and through which game media can pass;
A specific area (e.g., a specific area 38A) provided in the game area and capable of changing between a first mode that easily accepts the game medium and a second mode that does not easily accept the game medium, and through which the game medium can pass. A variable winning device (for example, the big winning opening 37),
start memory information storage means (for example, main RAM 63) capable of storing a plurality of start memory information indicating that the game medium has passed through the start area;
Each time the start memory information is stored in the start memory information storage means, a specific game state transition determination means ( For example, the main CPU 61),
Identification information display means (for example, first special symbol display part 53, second special symbol display part 54),
Specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 61) for controlling the game state to the specific game state on condition that the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display means becomes a specific display mode;
On the condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the specific game state, after the specific game state ends, the specific game state transition determination means determines that the specific game state is shifted to the specific game state. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 61) that controls to a special game state (for example, variable probability game state) that is easy to obtain,
Production execution means for producing production (for example, liquid crystal display device 4),
A production control means (for example, a sub CPU 71) that controls the production execution means,
The specific game state control means is capable of performing control to make passage of game media to the specific area relatively easy at least during a specific period (for example, a specific second round game) during the specific game state. and
When the game medium passes through the specific area in the specific game state and the condition for transition to the special game state is satisfied, the effect execution means provides a specific effect (for example, a V winning effect) indicating that fact. ), and
The effect control means, in the specific game state, when the game medium passes through the specific area and satisfies the transition condition to the special game state, the start memory stored in the start memory information storage means When the information includes the start memory information determined to be shifted to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means, the first effect (for example, special V winning effect When the performance execution means executes the performance execution means and the specific game state transition determination means does not include the start memory information determined to shift to the specific game state, the specific game state is not included. A second effect different from the first effect (for example, a V winning effect based on normal V winning effect data) is caused to be executed by the effect executing means.

In the tenth invention, in the specific game state (for example, jackpot game state), the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, specific area 38A) (V winning), to the special game state (for example, variable probability game state) When the transition condition is satisfied, a specific effect (for example, effect at the time of V winning) is performed, but in this case, the reserved start memory information determines that the transition to the specific game state is made. If there is, it is configured to perform a different effect than when there is no start memory information determined to shift to the specific game state. That is, when the game state after winning the V prize and the end of the specific game state is determined, that effect and the fact that the game will be held (or the possibility thereof) is notified. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately notify that the specific game state is on hold, and to improve interest.

According to the tenth invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately and in a manner that enhances interest in the fact that the jackpot game state continues to be held.

[Examples of other embodiments]
Next, another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66-69.

FIG. 66 is a perspective view showing a big winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. Components identical or similar to those in the above-described embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and descriptions thereof are omitted. Also, the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 66 is provided with only one big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 66, a large winning opening 37 is provided in a part of the game board. A ball passage 37B for guiding game balls downward is formed inside the big winning hole 37. - 特許庁A specific region 38A and a non-specific region 38B are provided at the lower end of the ball passage 37B so as to be laterally adjacent to each other. A large winning opening count switch 370 is arranged at a position where the player enters the ball passage from the large winning opening 37 . A specific area switch 380A is arranged in the specific area 38A, and V winning of a game ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is arranged in the non-specific area 38B, and passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. A displacement member 39' capable of lateral displacement is provided in the vicinity of the specified region 38A and the non-specified region 38B inside the ball passage 37B. The position of the displacement member 39' indicated by the solid line in FIG. 66 is the post-displacement position, and the position of the displacement member 39' indicated by the phantom line in FIG. 66 is the initial position.

The displacement member 39' switches the specific area 38A between an open state and a closed state. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 66, when the displacement member 39' is at the fixed position on the left side farthest from the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is opened, and the game ball to the specific area 38A V wins. make it easy. At this time, the displacement member 39' forms a gap between itself and the right side wall of the ball passage 37B through which the game ball can sufficiently pass. As a result, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through the space between the right side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39', and can pass through the specific area 38A. be. Also, when the displacement member 39' is at the fixed position on the left side, a gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'. Thereby, the game ball guided from above the ball passage 37B may pass through the non-specific area 38B through between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'.

In addition, when the specific area is to be opened, the displacement member may be moved to a position where the game ball cannot pass through the non-specific area. Further, when the specific area is opened, the first position of the displacement member that allows the game ball to pass through the non-specific area and the first position of the displacement member that prevents the game ball from passing through the non-specific area. The displacement member may be fixed at either of the two positions, and the displacement member may be controlled to move to the first position or the second position according to the game mode or the like. For example, when the displacement member is fixed at the second position, the game ball will pass through the specific area without fail if it wins the big prize opening, so the game is more advantageous for the player than the above-described embodiment. mode can be provided.

On the other hand, as shown by the phantom line in FIG. 66, when the displacement member 39' is at the fixed position on the right side closest to the specific region 38A, the specific region 38A is closed, and the game ball to the specific region 38A to make it impossible to win the V prize. At this time, the displacement member 39' forms a clearance between it and the left side wall of the ball passage 37B through which the game ball can pass. As a result, the game ball hit from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward through the gap between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39', and always passes through the non-specified area 38B. becomes.

Even in a pachinko game machine using such a displacement member 39', it is possible to shift to a probability variable game state or the like after the jackpot game state in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is successful in the big win game state. That is, according to the large winning opening 37 shown in FIG. 66, even if only one large winning opening (variable winning device) is provided, the second Since it is possible to execute a 1-round game and a specific second-round game that makes it relatively easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A, two large winning openings (variable winning device ), according to the opening pattern of the big winning opening (variable winning device) in the specific game state, to facilitate the transition to the special game state, or It is possible to provide a game machine having a game property that makes it difficult.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a large winning opening opening/closing pattern (modification) of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a displacement member operation pattern corresponding to the large winning opening opening/closing pattern of FIG. 67 and 68 are applied to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 67, the modified example of the large winning opening opening/closing pattern is basically the same as the large winning opening opening/closing pattern shown in FIG. This is a possible large winning opening opening/closing pattern. In such a big winning opening opening/closing pattern, as shown in FIG. 68, the displacement member 39' for opening and closing the specific area 38A is in an operating state only at the 4Rth position as an example, and is in the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. Become. On the other hand, in the 1st to 3rd R's and the 5th to 12th R's, the displacement member 39' is in a non-actuated state and is in a state indicated by a virtual line in FIG. Even in a pachinko game machine in which such a big winning hole opening/closing pattern is applied to one big winning hole, it is possible to achieve the same effects as in the above-described embodiment.

FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing special symbol control processing of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. This special pattern control process is a pachinko game machine in which only one big winning hole is provided but no specific area is provided, and whether or not to shift to a probability variable game state according to the type of big win pattern is determined by the main CPU. It applies to

As shown in FIG. 69, first, in S1000, the main CPU performs a process of determining whether or not there is start memory. In this process, if the main CPU determines that there is no start memory for the special symbol game, that is, if no data is stored in the special symbol start storage area (0) to the special symbol start storage area (4), the data is not stored. This process is repeated until it is stored. On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that there is start memory, it shifts the processing to S1001.

At S1001, the main CPU executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU, depending on whether or not the gaming state flag indicates the probability variable gaming state, a high probability jackpot determination table with a large number of jackpot determination values or a low probability jackpot determination table with a small number of jackpot determination values Refer to the jackpot determination table. In addition, the main CPU refers to the hit determination random number in the special symbol start storage area extracted when the game ball wins and the selected jackpot determination table. Then, the main CPU determines that the game is a big hit when the hit determination random value and the big win determination value match. In other words, the main CPU determines whether or not to set a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. That is, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process is finished, the process moves to S1002.

At S1002, the main CPU determines whether or not the result of determination at S1001 is a big hit. In this process, when the main CPU determines that the win is a big hit, the process proceeds to S1003. On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that it is not a big hit, that is, when it determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S1000.

In S1003, the main CPU controls the jackpot game state. That is, the main CPU sets a display command during opening of the big winning opening, data during opening of the big winning opening, and the like. When this process is finished, the process moves to S1004.

At S1004, the main CPU performs a process of determining whether or not the control of the jackpot gaming state executed at S1003 is based on the special symbol of the variable probability jackpot. If it is determined to be based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit, the process is moved to S1006. If it is determined that it is not based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit, the process is moved to S1005.

At S1005, the main CPU controls the non-probability variable gaming state after the jackpot gaming state that started control at S1003 ends. That is, in the big hit game state based on special symbols other than the probability variation big hit, it will shift to the non-probability variation game state after the end. After shifting to such a non-probability variable gaming state, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000 again.

At S1006, the main CPU controls the variable probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state that started control at S1003 ends. That is, in the big hit game state based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit, it will surely shift to the probability variation game state after the end. After shifting to such a variable probability gaming state, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000 again.

In a pachinko game machine to which such a special symbol control process is applied, by providing the same effect mode as in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to increase the interest of the game in rounds in which winning is easy in the big winning opening.

As described above, the present invention has been described using this embodiment and other embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these. That is, the specific configuration of each means provided in the present invention is not limited to the examples adopted in the present embodiment and other embodiments described above, and can be arbitrarily modified without departing from the scope of the present invention. is.

For example, various counters and various timers managed by the control of the main CPU 61 or the sub CPU 71 shown in this embodiment and other embodiments can be appropriately managed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. can be changed. For example, various counters and various timers managed by "addition" may be managed by "subtraction". In this case, the judgment of whether it is "more than" is read as the judgment of "less than", and the judgment of whether it is "greater than" is read as whether it is "less than". It can be read as judgment. Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed by "subtraction" may be managed by "addition". In this case, the judgment as to whether it is "less than or equal to" should be read as the judgment as to whether it is "more than or equal to", and the judgment as to whether it is "less than" should be read as whether it is "greater than" or not. It can be read as judgment.

Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed under the control of the main CPU 61 shown in this embodiment and other embodiments are managed under the control of the sub CPU 71 within the scope of the present invention. Alternatively, the various counters and timers managed under the control of the sub CPU 71 may be managed under the control of the main CPU 61 within the scope of the present invention.

Further, for example, various game states managed by the control of the main CPU 61 shown in this embodiment and other embodiments are managed by the control of the sub CPU 71 within the scope of the present invention. Alternatively, various performance modes managed by the control of the sub CPU 71 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 61 within the scope of the present invention.

All inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments are applicable to pachislot machines, slot machines, game machines, pinball game machines and all other game machines within the scope of the invention. can do.

In particular, a pachislot machine is equipped with a main control circuit and a sub-control circuit, and can detect a start operation (for example, an operation to a start lever) based on the insertion of game media (for example, medals). , based on the fact that the start operation is performed, an advantageous state (for example, big bonus (BB), middle bonus (MB), regular bonus (RB), replay time (RT), assist time (AT ), assist replay time (ART)), or whether or not to grant a predetermined profit (e.g., payout of medals, operation of replay) ”), start spinning a plurality of reels with identification information (e.g., a plurality of patterns, symbols), and perform a stop operation (e.g., operation to the stop button). The rotation of a plurality of reels is controlled to stop so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination is stopped, and depending on the stopped combination of symbols, the player is shifted to an advantageous state or given a predetermined profit. Therefore, it is easy to apply the inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments.

That is, the invention described in this embodiment and other embodiments includes symbol display means (for example, a plurality of reels) that variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, and start operation means for performing a start operation (for example, start lever), internal winning combination determination means (for example, main control circuit) for determining an internal winning combination based on the start operation, and symbol display means for displaying on the basis of the start operation. symbol variation start control means (e.g., main control circuit) for starting variation display of symbols, stop operation means (e.g., stop button) for performing a stop operation, and internal winning that has been determined and that the stop operation has been performed Symbol variation stop control means (e.g., main control circuit) for stopping the variation display of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means based on the combination, and the symbol variation stop control means stop the variation display of the symbols by the symbol display means, Profit providing means (for example, main control circuit) for providing profit according to the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the pattern display means, effect display means (for example, liquid crystal display device) for performing effect display, and said effect display means It is easy to apply to a pachi-slot machine, which is a game machine provided with effect control means (for example, a sub-control circuit or a main control circuit) that controls the .

1 Game Board 1p Game Area 4 Liquid Crystal Display Device 32 First Startup Port 33 Second Startup Port 36 First Big Winning Port 36A First Big Winning Port Shutter 37 Second Big Winning Port 37 Second Big Winning Port Shutter 38A Specific Region 38B Non-specific regions 39, 39' Displacement member 61 Main CPU
71 Sub CPU
73 Work RAM
83 dispensing device

Claims (1)

Advantageous state control means capable of controlling an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player;
production execution means for producing production;
Production control means for controlling the production execution means,
and an operation means capable of accepting a predetermined operation of the player,
The production execution means is capable of performing a specific production,
The specific effect sequentially transitions through a plurality of effect stages, and when it moves to the final effect stage and a specific condition is satisfied in the final effect stage , the predetermined effect is performed. is done,
Either a predetermined production stage or a specific production stage can be set for the production stage in the plurality of production stages,
The specific effect includes at least a first effect pattern in which the predetermined effect stage is set as the final effect stage, and a second effect pattern in which the specific effect stage is set as the final effect stage. including
The production control means, in the specific production,
When the current performance stage is the predetermined performance stage, when the predetermined operation is performed, according to the lottery result of a predetermined lottery, when it is not the final performance stage , it is shifted to the next performance stage. is possible, and in the case of the final production stage, it is possible to establish the specific condition,
When the current performance stage is the specific performance stage, when the predetermined operation is performed after the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, if the performance stage is not the final performance stage , the next performance stage is performed, and the final performance stage is performed. If it is the production stage of, the specific condition is established,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific effect may be shifted to the final effect stage without shifting to the specific effect stage as the plurality of effect stages.

Images